625688
262
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/276
Next page
Owner´s Manual
In-car safety
There is an In-car safety & Quick Reference Guide found in
your car which contains some quick reference concerning
safety issues.
Make sure you keep this Reference Guide readily available
for all occupants to review.
Replacement and/or additional Reference Guides may be
ordered from your Saab dealer.
1
Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-5, Model Year 2005
Safety 11
Security 37
Instruments and controls 51
Saab 9-5 Audio System 83
Interior equipment and trunk 105
Starting and driving 131
Car care and technical information 181
Customer Assistance and Information 245
Specifications 251
Index 265
©
Saab Automobile AB 2004
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden
2
Introduction
This manual provides practical guidance on
driving and caring for your Saab.
The Saab 9-5 is available with the following
engine variants:
2.3t 185 hp (Linear)
2.3T 220 hp (Arc)
2.3 Turbo 250 hp (Aero)
Although this manual describes the most
important differences between model vari-
ants, it does not include precise specifica-
tions of the different variants. Some diffe-
rences also occur to meet special legal
requirements in different countries.
Importation and distribution of Saab auto-
mobiles, spare parts and accessories are
handled exclusively by General Motors of
Canada Limited in Canada and by Saab
Cars USA, Inc. in the U.S.A.
We recommend that you read through the
manual before taking the car out for the first
time and that you keep it in the car for future
reference.
To find a specific item, use the overviews
given on pages 3–6. A list of contents is
given at the beginning of each section of the
manual, and there is also a comprehensive
index at the back of the book.
Supplied with the car is a Warranty and Ser-
vice Record booklet and a tire warranty
folder which specifies the regular mainte-
nance to be carried out. The book also con-
tains important warranty conditions.
Since the policy at Saab is one of continual
improvement, we retain the right to incorpo-
rate modifications and to alter specifications
during production without prior notice.
If you have any questions concerning your
car, its equipment, the warranty conditions
or the like, your Saab dealer will be pleased
to help.
Best wishes,
Saab Automobile AB
Saab Automobile AB does not accept liability for
any damage caused by the fitting of spare parts,
exchange parts or accessories that are not
approved by Saab Automobile AB.
The specifications, design particulars and illus-
trations included in the manual are not binding.
WARNING
WARNING texts warn against the danger
of injury if the specified instructions are
not followed.
NOTICE
NOTICE texts warn of potential damage
to the car if the recommendations are not
followed.
IB1734
3
Instrument panel
IB1080
Indicator and warning lights______ 52
Speedometer_________________ 59
Odometer and trip meter ________ 58
Fuel gauge___________________ 59
Temperature gauge ____________ 59
Parking lights____________ 67
High/low beam __________ 67
Daytime running lights_____ 67
Instrument illumination ____ 69
Changing bulbs__________ 197
Rear fog light____________ 68
Turn signal and lane change
indicators ______________ 69
High beam flasher________ 67
Cruise control ___________ 151
Front fog lights___________ 70
Ashtrays (accessory)___________ 117
Cigarette lighters (accessory) ____ 118
Saab Information Display (SID) ___ 61
Night panel___________________ 65
Clock _______________________ 66
Wipers and washers______ 71
Rear-window wiper_______ 72
Rain sensing wipers______ 71
Washers_______________ 196
Wipers and washers______ 195
Saab 9-5 Audio System ___ 83
Steering-wheel controls ___ 100
Hazard warning lights_____ 70
Automatic climate control
(ACC) ________________ 73
Air conditioning (ACC) ____ 234
Electric heating, front seats (if equip-
ped) _______________________ 15
Ventilated front seats___________ 14
Steering-wheel controls ___ 100
Sentronic, manual mode ___ 148
4
Exterior
IB1736
Driving with a roof rack load______ 166
Fitting the roof carriers, 9-5 Sedan
and 9-5 Wagon without roof rails _ 166
Maximum roof load ____________ 252
Rearview mirror_______________ 108
Hood _______________________ 182
Engine compartment: washing ___ 238
Central locking __________ 38
Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan __ 42
Tailgate, 9-5 SportWagon__ 43
Child safety locks ________ 41
Car alarm ______________ 44
Headlights _____________ 67
High/low beam __________ 67
Turn signal and lane change
indicators______________ 69
Headlight washers _______ 71
Changing bulbs _________ 197
Fuel gauge___________________ 59
Refueling ____________________ 138
Economical motoring___________ 157
Fuel ________________________ 254
b
Tires pressure ________________ 261
Wheels and tires ______________ 260
Braking______________________ 152
Driving in cold weather__________ 159
Compact spare tire_____________ 230
Changing a wheel _____________ 231
Trunk _______________________ 121
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan __ 121
Folding the rear seat,
9-5 SportWagon______________ 124
Trunk Release Handle__________ 130
Spare wheel and tools__________ 170
Compact spare tire ____________ 230
Towing a trailer __________ 161
Towing the car___________ 171
Rear towing eye _________ 172
Headlights______________ 67
Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan 203
Rear lights clusters,
9-5 SportWagon_________ 206
Changing bulbs__________ 197
Sunroof ________________ 114
Washing the car _________ 237
Waxing and polishing _____ 238
Touching up the paint _____ 238
Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 240
5
Interior
IB3150
Rearview mirrors ______________ 107
Door mirrors__________________ 107
Sun visors ___________________ 117
Safety belts ____________ 16
Airbag_________________ 28
Child safety ____________ 21
Child safety locks ________ 41
Safety belts, maintenance _ 235
Glove compartment ______ 118
Manual transmission _____ 142
Automatic transmission ___ 143
Electric windows ______________ 113
Ignition switch ________________ 132
Starting the engine ____________ 133
Engine Break-In Period _________ 142
Driving in hot weather __________ 160
Driving in cold weather _________ 159
Parking _____________________ 179
Steering wheel adjustment _ 106
Airbag _________________ 28
Power steering fluid_______ 191
Steering-wheel controls ___ 100
Sentronic, manual mode ___ 148
Seats__________________ 12
Electric heating, front seats (if
equipped)______________ 15
Ventilated front seats______ 14
Safety belts _____________ 16
Child safety _____________ 21
Folding the rear seat,
9-5 Sedan _____________ 121
Folding the rear seat,
9-5 SportWagon_________ 124
Upholstery and trim_______ 236
Side airbags ____________ 32
Interior lighting________________ 116
Sunroof _____________________ 114
Dome light, front ______________ 209
6
Engine compartment
IB3636
Engine ______________________ 186
Checking the oil level ___________ 186
Changing engine oil____________ 187
Engine oil, specification_________ 255
Braking______________________ 152
ABS brakes __________________ 153
Brake and clutch fluid___________ 189
Brake system_________________ 259
Brake pads___________________ 259
Fuses _________________ 211
Changing a fuse_________ 213
Relays ________________ 215
Table of fuses___________ 211
Temperature gauge ______ 59
Driving in hot weather_____ 160
Driving in cold weather____ 159
Coolant________________ 188
Coolant capacity_________ 254
Power steering fluid_______ 191
Steering, technical data ___ 259
Wipers and washers______ 71
Washers_______________ 196
Washer jets ____________ 196
Jump starting _________________ 174
Battery ______________________ 192
Charging/replacing the battery____ 193
Manual transmission ___________ 142
Automatic transmission _________ 143
Automatic transmission,
technical data________________ 258
Manual gearbox, technical data___ 258
Important considerations for driving 136
Turbo unit ___________________ 183
Engine, technical data__________ 254
Ignition switch ___________ 132
Drive belts______________ 194
Spark plugs_____________ 257
Catalytic converter _______ 137
Warning labels __________ 7
V.I.N. number ___________ 262
Engine number __________ 262
Gearbox number _________ 262
Color code______________ 262
Tire and Loading Information
Label _________________ 226
7
Battery
No sparks, flames or smoking.
Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns.
Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast.
Do not tip battery. Do not open battery.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
Brake fluid
CLEAN FILLER CAP BEFORE
REMOVING. USE ONLY DOT 4
FLUID FROM SEALED CONTAI-
NER.
Radiator fan
Radiator fan may start at any
time.
IB336
A/C system
Refrigerant at high pressure.
Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before
discharging the A/C system. Improper service methods
may cause personal injury. System to be serviced by
authorized personnel only. For instructions consult
workshop manual.
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
Charge: 825 g of R134a.
Compressor oil: PAG oil SP-10 alt.
Saab oil 4759106
Oil amount: See workshop manual.
Warning labels
AVOID SPARKS AND OPEN FLAMES,
NO SMOKING
WEAR EYE PROTECTION
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
•ACID
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
FLAMMABLE GAS
Coolant:
Never open when engine hot!
8
IB336
Jack
Jack is designed only for changing a tire or
mounting tire snow chains.
Vehicle must be level and the jack must be
placed on a firm and level ground.
Never crawl underneath vehicle when it is
jacked up.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to
park.
2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel
to be changed (See illustration).
3 Crank jack so that car begins to lift.
4 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel
bolts one-half turn.
5 Raise vehicle so that tire clears ground.
Loosen wheel bolts completely and remove
wheel.
6 Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough
so wheel is not loose.
7 Lower car. Tighten wheel bolts in a crisscross
sequence.
CANADA
USA
WARNING
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur.
Children 12 and under can be killed by the airbag
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children
NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front
Sit as far back as possible from the airbag
ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTRAINTS
Contact a Saab dealer if a
xenon headlight requires
replacement.
This label is only found on
cars with xenon head-
lights.
Jack
Use only on specified vehicles. Safe working load 1100 kg. Use
on level firm ground only. Do not get under a vehicle that is sup-
ported only by a jack, use vehicle support stands. No persons
are to remain in the vehicle.
For more information see your owner´s manual.
9
No sparks, fla-
mes or smo-
king.
Buckle up
Use protective
goggles
Airbag
Keep out of
reach of
children.
Never place a
rear-facing
child seat in
this seat.
Battery acid
contains
sulfuric acid.
Electric
windows
Refer to the
Owner’s
Manual.
Deactivating
of rear window
switches
Risk of
explosive gas.
Central
locking, lock
.
Central
locking,
unlock
Tru nk
lid/tailgate,
opening
Headlights
Windshield
wipers
Direction
indicators
Windshield
washers
Parking lights Defroster
Hazard
warning lights
Rear window
heating
Front fog
lights
Ventilation fan
Rear fog
light
Coolant
temperature
Radiator fan
Battery
charging
Fuel
Foot brake
Coolant level
Engine oil
pressure
ABS brakes
Examples of symbols that can be found in your car
10
(This page has been left blank)
11Safety
Seats ________________ 12
Head restraint _________ 15
Safety belts ___________ 16
Child safety ___________ 21
Airbag________________ 28
IB1740
Safety
12 Safety
Seats
Both front seats are electrically operated.
On certain models the driver´s seat is equip-
ped with a memory function.
To facilitate getting into the car, both seats
can be adjusted when either of the front
doors is open.
For safety reasons, if the door is closed, the
seat can only be adjusted when the ignition
is ON.
Note, however, that both seats can be
adjusted for 30 seconds after both doors
have been closed.
The following seat adjustments can be
made to achieve a comfortable driving
position:
height
legroom
backrest rake angle
lumbar support (driver´s seat)
head-restraint height
We recommend that adjustments to the
driver’s seat be performed in the following
order:
1height
2 legroom
3 seat tilt angle
4 backrest rake angle
Lastly, adjust the steering wheel (see
page 106).
Side airbags
(see page 32).
Head restraint
(see page 15).
Height
To raise the seat, lift the lower control
straight up.
To lower the seat, press the lower control
down.
The same control can be used to adjust the
height of the front and rear edges of the seat
independently.
WARNING
The seats are actuated by powerful
motors. Bear this in mind when adjusting
the seat, and make sure that nothing gets
caught and damaged. Ensure that not-
hing can be trapped when adjusting the
seat.
Bear in mind that children can be injured
if they play with the electrically-operated
seats.
Always remove the ignition key when you
leave the car. This prevents personal
injury caused by the electrically adjusta-
ble seats, for example, due to children
playing.
WARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat except
when the car is stationary.
IB3225
13Safety
Legroom adjustment
To adjust the legroom, push the lower con-
trol forward or back.
Backrest rake angle
To adjust the backrest, move the upper con-
trol forward or back.
Lumbar support
Turn the smaller wheel for stepless adjust-
ment of the lumbar support.
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during dri-
ving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash and in particular a rear-end
collision.
IB3226
IB3227
IB1161
14 Safety
Memory driver’s seat
(if equipped)
In certain models the driver´s seat is equip-
ped with a programmable memory function.
This function also includes the door mirrors.
Adjust the seat and door mirrors.
To save the settings, press and hold the M
button and, at the same time, press one of
the preselect buttons (1, 2 or 3). The Saab
Information Display (SID) will chime to con-
firm that the settings have been saved.
To recall the programmed settings, press
and hold the appropriate preset button,
whereupon the seat and mirrors will be
adjusted automatically.
To change the settings stored in a preset
button, adjust the seat and mirrors as before
and save the new settings by pressing M
and the appropriate preset button.
To facilitate reversing, the passenger side
door mirror can be tilted down automati-
cally, e.g. to show the curb. To do this,
select reverse and press the small grey
button adjacent to the door-mirror control.
When you deselect reverse, the mirror will
automatically return to its original setting
(see page 107).
Ventilated front seats
(if equipped)
Ventilated front seats, that enhance seating
comfort in hot weather, are an option on Arc
and Aero models (certain markets).
Ventilated seats are equipped with two fans
that extract the moist air from between the
seat and the body.
The fans have three speeds and are OFF
when the switch is set to 0.
IB404
IB405
15Safety
Electric heating, front seats
(if equipped)
Both front seats have adjustable and ther-
mostat-controlled heating of the seat
cushion and backrest, available as an
option.
Heating is adjustable in three stages. In
position 0 it is turned off.
Head restraint
The front seats in the Saab 9-5 are equip-
ped with Saab Active Head Restraints
(SAHRs). These reduce the risk of whiplash
injury if the car is hit from behind.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
head restraint forward and upward, thus
limiting the backward movement of the
head.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actua-
ted by body weight. The mechanism is built
into the top of the backrest, where it is con-
nected to the head restraint.
Therefore, the SAHR does not need to be
replaced after a minor rear-end crash.
The head restraint can be raised or lowered
and is adjustable in various positions.
Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
Lowering: press the catch on the left-hand
side of the attaching point and press down
the head restraint.
WARNING
Adjust the head restraint so that your
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.
Raise the head restraints in the seat
that are occupied.
IB406
IB400
16 Safety
Rear-seat head restraints
9-5 Sedan: The rear head restraints have
three adjustment positions for passenger
comfort.
They can also be folded down to increase
the driver’s rearward vision when the seat is
unoccupied.
9-5 SportWagon: The height of the rear
head restraints can be adjusted by depres-
sing the catch on the left-hand collar in the
same way as the front head restraints.
See page 15 for adjustment procedure.
Safety belts
Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are pro-
vided for all seats.
The results of studies show that it is equally
important to wear safety belts in the rear
seat as in the front seats.
Bear in mind that in certain states/provinces
it is a legal requirement for all occupants of
the car to wear a safety belt.
Safety belt reminder
When the ignition is switched on, the
”FASTEN BELTS” reminder will light up until
the driver fastens the safety belt. In addition
an audible signal sounds for 6 seconds, or
until the driver fastens his belt.
Safety belt pretensioners
The belts of the front seats are fitted with
automatic pretensioners and force limiters.
These are activated in the event of a severe
frontal or rear-end crash and a side-on col-
lision, provided that the safety belts are
being worn.
The pretensioners serve to reduce the for-
ward movement of the body by tensioning
the belt. The force limiters reduce belt loads
on the body by "loosening" the safety belt to
absorb the body’s kinetic energy as gradu-
ally as possible.
WARNING
Buckle up and adjust your safety belt
before driving off so that you can pay
full attention to the traffic.
Safety belts must be worn at all times
by all car occupants.
Child safety, see page 21.
Check that the locking tongue is pro-
perly locked in the belt lock.
In the event of a crash, the rear-seat
passengers not wearing a seatbelt will
be thrown forward against the
front-seat backrests. The stresses
imposed on the front seat passengers
and belts are multiplied and can result
in needless injury or even death for all
car occupants.
IB460
IB409
FASTEN BELTS
17Safety
The safety belt pretensioners are not acti-
vated by vehicle rollover.
Correct position for safety belt
Position the lap strap snugly and low
across the hips so that it just touches the
thighs. The shoulder strap must be as far
in on the shoulder as possible.
Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted
or rubbing against any sharp edges.
There should not be any slack in the belt.
Pull the belt tight – particularly important
when thick outer clothing is worn. It
is advisable to remove thick items of
clothing.
Refrain from tilting the backrest more than
necessary, as the safety belt provides
better protection when the seat is in a
more upright position.
Only one person per safety belt!
For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
the retractor will allow the wearer freedom
of movement. The retractor locks up auto-
matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are app-
lied hard or a crash occurs.
Children up to 6 years of age must always
be seated in a child seat. Saab recom-
mends the use of a child seat for children
up to the age of 10.
Children who have grown out of a child
seat should be restrained by the car’s
standard three-point belts. Make sure that
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
neck or throat. If it is, a booster
seat/cushion may be necessary.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other com-
ponents must be inspected by an authori-
zed Saab dealer and replaced as neces-
sary.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself. Visit an authori-
zed Saab dealer for any necessary
repairs.
WARNING
Proper positioning of the safety belt is
extremely important.
An out of position safety belt can result
in the occupant sliding underneath the
belt in a crash (submarining) and
injury can result from the lap portion
cutting into the abdomen.
Never fasten the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind the body or pull
the belt off the shoulder and under the
arm.
If two people share a belt, they risk
injury by being crushed together in the
event of a crash.
IB410
Correctly positioned safety belt
18 Safety
Front safety belts
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and inser-
ting the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
Then grip the belt at the shoulder, pull it out
and, without letting go, allow the slack to be
taken up by the reel. Make sure that the belt
is well in on the shoulder.
Because the lower belt-anchorage points
are on the seat, the belt buckle follows the
movement of the seat during seat adjust-
ment.
To release the belt, press the red button on
the belt buckle, as illustrated.
See page 235 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
Belt height adjustment
The front safety belts and the outside belts
in the rear (9-5 Sedan) are equipped with
automatic height adjustment.
After fastening the belt, grasp it at chest
height, pull it out and, without letting go,
allow the slack to be taken up by the reel.
Make sure that the belt is well in on the
shoulder.
IB411
To fasten the belt
IB412
Press the red button to release the belt
19Safety
Safety belt use during pregnancy
Pregnant women must always wear a
safety belt to protect both themselves and
the unborn child.
The lap belt should be placed low, across
the hips and over the upper thighs.
Safety belt, rear seat
Three-point safety belts are provided for all
three rear seat passengers.
Fasten the belt by pulling out the strap care-
fully and inserting the tongue in the lock.
Check that it is securely fastened.
Then grip the diagonal part of the strap near
the lock and pull the belt upwards towards
the shoulder to tighten the lap strap. The lap
strap should lie low over the hips.
The diagonal part should lie as far in on the
shoulder as possible.
To release the belt, press the red button on
the belt lock.
See page 235 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
WARNING
Make sure that the belt does not
become trapped when the backrest is
folded down or raised (see page 121).
If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
must be properly secured with the
safety belt. This reduces the risk of the
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
Make sure you use the correct safety
belt buckle. The buckles for the center
and left-hand rear seats are close
together.
IB414
20 Safety
WARNING
Safety belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front of
the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
lap section of the belt across the abdo-
minal area must be avoided.
Safety belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed. A
loose belt will greatly reduce the pro-
tection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid conta-
mination of the webbing with polishes,
oils and chemicals, and particularly
battery acid. Cleaning may safely be
carried out using mild soap and water.
The belt should be replaced if webbing
becomes frayed, contaminated or
damaged.
It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in a
severe impact even if damage to the
assembly is not obvious.
Belts should not be worn with straps
twisted.
Each belt assembly must only be used
by one occupant; it is dangerous to put
a belt around a child being carried on
the occupant´s lap.
No modifications or additions should
be made by the user which will either
prevent the safety belt adjusting
device from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the safety belt
assembly from being adjusted to
remove slack.
IB416
Securing an item on the rear seat
IB???IB415
Safety belt, rear seat
21Safety
Child safety
Car safety tips
For Trunk Release Handle information see
page 42 and 130.
WARNING
Children must always be suitably res-
trained in the car.
DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur.
Children 12 and under or
shorter than 55 inches
(140 cm) can be killed by
the airbag.
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place
for children.
NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.
Sit as far back as possible from the air-
bag.
ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in a
car, even for a short time.
Children can suffer heat stroke – per-
haps die – in a matter of minutes.
Children can put the car into gear and
hurt themselves or others.
At gas stations, take the keys from the
car while filling the tank.
Never allow children to climb on top of
– or under cars.
Always look for children before back-
ing your car out of a garage or drive-
way.
To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
never let a car idle in an enclosed
garage.
Supervise young children around
buckets of water while washing your
car. Small children can drown in a
short time in less than an inch of water.
WARNING
Protect children from getting
trapped in the trunk of a car
Teach children not to play in or around
cars.
Watch children when loading or unlo-
ading the car so they don’t get locked
in by mistake.
Always lock the doors and trunk of
your car, and keep the keys out of
children´s sight and reach.
Keep the rear fold-down seats closed
to help prevent kids from getting into
the trunk from inside the car.
22 Safety
The same attention must be given to child
safety in the car as is given to adults.
Saab recommends rearward facing child
restraints.
Children travel most safely when properly
restrained, but restraints must be suitable
for the size of the child. Always follow the
child seat/booster cushion manufacturer´s
instructions when installing these devices in
your vehicle.
Make sure you are acquainted with the
legal requirements for seating children
in the car.
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child res-
traint in accordance with the manufacturer’s
child seat instructions.
When fitting child seats in cars you must
always read the instructions supplied by
the manufacturer.
LATCH
LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers
for CHildren) consists of top tether and
lower anchorage (“ISOFIX”) for child res-
traints in two outboard the rear seats.
ISOFIX are lower attachments located
where the seat and back cushions come
together. Top tethers are upper attach-
ments located on parcel shelf or torsion
beam, see page 24 and 25.
Saab recommends rearward facing child
restraints for children 3 and under.
23Safety
LATCH installation
To facilitate the proper fitting of new speci-
ally-designed child restraints, rigid lower
anchorages (ISOFIX) have been installed to
the vehicle that shall be used with the top
tether anchorages in the two outboard rear
seating positions. There is an additional top
tether anchorage for the center rear seating
position that is to be used together with the
safety belt.
LATCH is a U.S./Canadian government
standard for the uniform method of fitting
child restraints without using the standard
safety belts. Only certain child restraints are
equipped to utilize these rigid lower ancho-
rages behind where the seat cushion and
seat back come together. LATCH child
seats also utilize a top tether strap that is
found on some newer child seats that still
require installation with the standard safety
belts.
There are two bars attached to the car body
for each specially designed LATCH child
restraint. A small label is located on the seat
back just above the attachment bars to faci-
litate installing the child restraint. The label
contains a circle and a rearward facing child
restraint.
1 Place the child restraint on the seat
cushion.
2 Press the child restraint rearward into
the space between the backrest and
cushion, lining up the restraint attach-
ment arms with the labels.
3 Follow the child restraint instructions to
confirm that both restraint arms are pro-
perly attached to the bars.
4 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car
anchorage and tighten according to the
restraint instructions, see page 24
and 25.
5 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that restraint is securely attached
at both the lower anchorage bars and
the top tether strap.
For the top tether, only use the strap supp-
lied with the child restraint.
Always follow the installation instructions
supplied with the child restraint.
The availability of LATCH child restraints
may be limited.
When fitting child seats in cars you must
always read the instructions supplied by
the car seat manufacturer.
IB1684
Rigid 2-point lower attachment with top
tether
IB1685
Semi-rigid 2-point lower attachment with
top tether
24 Safety
Child tether anchorages for
forward facing child car seats
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
anchored according to Canadian and USA
laws.
If you have any questions regarding child
tether anchorages please contact your
Saab dealer.
9-5 Sedan:
1 Open the cover for the child tether
anchorage that is behind the seating
position in which the child restraint is to
be installed. Make sure it locks.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Secure the lower part of the child res-
traint by means of the lower anchorages
(ISOFIX) or the safety belts as descri-
bed in the child restraint mounting ins-
truction.
4 Route the tether under the headrest.
5 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
6 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
7 Pull the child restraints to make a
second check that the restraints are
securely attached at both the lower
anchorages bars and the top tether
strap.
WARNING
Child tether anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
IB1698
Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf,
Saab 9-5 Sedan
25Safety
9-5 SportWagon:
1 Fold the backrest of the rear seat for-
ward, see page 121.
2 Fold the anchor that is right behind the
child restraint to its upright position.
3 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
4 Raise the head restraint to its upper
position and then route the tether under
the head restraint.
5 Attach the tether to the anchor.
6 Raise the backrest of the rear seat.
Make sure it locks properly.
7 Secure the lower part of the child res-
traint by means of the safety belt or lower
anchorages (ISOFIX) as described in
the child restraint mounting instruction
on the previous page.
8 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
9 Pull the child restraints to make a
second check that the restraints are
securely attached at both the lower
anchorages bars and the top tether
strap.
It is not possible to route the tether through
the cargo net (accessory), if one is fitted.
Instead we recommend a cargo guard
(accessory).
WARNING
Make sure the child-restraint anchorages
are folded all the way up or down other-
wise it can obstruct locking the rear seat
backrest.
IB1352
Child tether anchorages, Saab 9-5 Sport-
Wagon
26 Safety
Lockable belt tongue
In fitting a child seat that is intended to be
secured in position by the lap portion of the
safety belt, make use of the locking function
of the buckle.
Locking the lap portion of the belt lessens
the risk that the seat will work loose while
the car is in motion.
The button for the locking function is located
on the back of the buckle.
1 Position the child seat in the back of the
car.
2 To activate the locking function, move
the locking button on the tongue of the
belt to the position marked
”CHILD SEAT” (item 1 in the figure) in
order to activate the locking function.
3 Secure the base of the child seat with
the lap portion of the safety belt in accor-
dance with the installation instructions
accompanying the child seat.
4 Grasp the shoulder part of the safety belt
and pull it upwards to tighten the lap por-
tion against the child seat.
5 Check for correct locking function by pul-
ling on the lap portion of the belt. The
belt must not unreel.
IB822
Locking the lap belt
1 Locked
2 Unlocked
27Safety
Installation of child restraint using the
standard safety belt
Child restraints that are approved for rear-
ward facing installation in the rear seat can
be positioned in any of the three rear seating
positions.
If you intend to install another make of child
restraint make sure that it is possible to fit it
in accordance with the manufacturer’s ins-
tructions.
Saab recommends rearward facing child
restraints up to 3 years.
WARNING
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
instructions on the use of this child res-
traint system can cause your child to
strike the vehicle´s interior during a
sudden stop or crash.
WARNING
A special accessory is available for lock-
ing the center armrest so that a child seat
can be installed in the middle seat. See
your Saab dealer for details.
When a rear-facing child seat is fitted in
the center position of the rear seat in the
Saab 9-5 Sedan the center armrest must
be secured in place with this strap. If this
is not done, the center armrest could
swing down in the event of a frontal crash
and cause injury to the child.
IB1204
Fitting the locking strap on the center arm-
rest, Saab 9-5 Sedan (not needed on
SportWagon).
28 Safety
Airbag
The AIRBAG system comprises an airbag in
the steering wheel, a front passenger airbag
and side airbags in the front seats.
The system supplements the protection
provided by the safety belts to further
enhance the safety of the occupants.
If a fault is detected in the AIRBAG, the
AIR BAG warning light on the main instru-
ment panel will come on (see pages 55
and 33).
When the system is triggered by impact of a
frontal crash, the airbags in the steering
wheel and passenger side of the dash board
are inflated, after which they deflate through
vents in the back of the bags.
The driver and passenger airbags are refer-
red ta as ‘smart’ airbags. This means that
the system compensates for factors such as
the force of the collision.
Note:
The sensor reacts differently depending on
whether or not the front seatbelts on the dri-
ver’s and passenger sides are used. Situa-
tions can therefore arise where only one of
the airbags inflates.
It is also possible for only the seatbelt pre-
tensioners to be activated and for the air-
bags to remain uninflated.
The entire process takes less than
0.1 second – literally, faster than the blin-
king of an eye.
These airbags are triggered only by mode-
rate to severe frontal or near-frontal cras-
hes. They will not be activated by minor
front-end impacts, rear-end or side impacts,
or by the car rolling over.
WARNING
To reduce risk of injury:
Always wear your safety belt.
Always adjust your seat so that you
are as far back as possible but still
able to operate the pedals and reach
the steering wheel and controls com-
fortably.
Children 12 and under or shorter than
55 inches (140 cm) should always
travel in the rear seat as the car is fitted
with a passenger airbag.
Never fit a child seat in front of the pas-
senger airbag.
IB419
Inflated airbag (driver side)
Inflation and deflation together take less than
0.1 second.
29Safety
WARNING
Even if the car is equipped with AIR-
BAG, safety belts must still always be
worn by all occupants.
Note that because an airbag inflates
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
not provide protection against a
second impact occurring in the same
incident. Always use your safety belt.
Always sit with the whole of your back
in contact with the backrest of the seat,
and with your seat as far back as is
practical. Otherwise you will be thrown
back against the backrest when the
airbag inflates which could cause you
injury or death. The airbag needs
room in which to inflate.
Never attach anything to the steering
wheel or passenger side of the instru-
ment panel, as this could result in
injury if the airbag should inflate. The
same applies to anything you might
have in your mouth, such as a pipe, for
instance.
Some components of the airbag will
be warm for a short time. In some cir-
cumstances the airbag can cause
minor burns or abrasions to the body
when the airbag inflates/deflates.
To reduce the risk of head injuries in
the event of a crash, the headliner and
pillar trims incorporate energy absor-
bing material. These areas must not
be modified in any way. Work on these
areas must only be carried out by an
authorized Saab dealer.
Fumes are generated by the chemical
reaction that inflates the airbag.
Because the dust/fumes can, in cer-
tain cases, cause irritation to the skin,
the following measures should be
taken:
Skin surfaces that show signs of irrita-
tion should be washed with clean
water and a mild soap as soon as pos-
sible.
In the event of eye irritation, flush the
eyes thoroughly with clean water for at
least 20 minutes.
In case of persistent irritation, consult
a doctor.
Never rest your hands or forearms on
the steering-wheel center padding.
If the AIR BAG warning light does not
extinguish after the car has been
started, or comes on or flashes while
driving, have the car checked immedi-
ately by an authorized Saab dealer.
The warning light could signify that the
airbags may not inflate in a crash, or
they could even inflate without a
crash. See page 55.
IB420
Passenger airbag and driver’s airbag both
inflated
30 Safety
IB1742
5
1
4
2
6
3
2
6
7
7
5
AIRBAG system with belt pretensioners
1 Central sensor
2 Belt pretensioners (for both front safety belts)
3 Steering wheel with integral airbag
4 Passenger airbag
5 Side-airbag sensor
6 Side airbag
7 Front sensors
IB1743
Accessories and other equipment must
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
these are where the airbags inflate in the
event of a crash.
IB417
Moment of impact.
The sensors detect
deceleration and send
a signal via the cen-
tral sensor to the gas
generator that infla-
tes the airbag.
The inflating airbag
cushions the driver.
Airbag now fully infla-
ted.
The airbag starts to
deflate.
31Safety
Front passenger seat
The airbags are interconnected and have a
common warning light. The passenger
airbag module is housed in the fascia above
the glove compartment and is marked ”SRS
AIRBAG”. (SRS = Supplementary Restraint
System.)
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccu-
pied.
WARNING
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
the right front seat of a car equipped with
a passenger airbag. Inflation of the airbag
in the event of a crash could seriously
injure or kill a child.
WARNING
DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur.
Children 12 and under or
shorter than 55 inches
(140 cm) can be killed by
the airbag.
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place
for children.
NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.
Sit as far back as possible from the air-
bag.
ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS.
Never allow a child to stand in front of
the seat or to sit on the lap of a
front-seat passenger. Serious injury or
death could result if the airbag is infla-
ted in a crash.
The glove compartment must be
closed while travelling. An open glove
compartment door could cause leg
injuries in the event of a crash.
Never place anything on the dash or in
front of the seat as, in addition to being
a hazard to passengers, this could
interfere with the function of the airbag
in the event of a crash. The same app-
lies to the mounting of accessories on
the dash.
Keep feet on the floor – never put feet
up on the fascia, on the seat or out of
the window.
Do not carry anything in your lap.
32 Safety
Side airbags
The side airbags, which help protect the
upper body are integrated in the outside
edges of the front seat backrests.
In a side impact, only the airbag on that side
will be activated, and only then if certain pre-
determined conditions are met such as the
force and angle of the impact, the speed of
the car on impact, and at which point on the
car’s side the impact occurs.
The sensors, which are fitted in the front
doors, sense the rise in pressure caused by
the door panel being pressed in during an
impact condition. The side airbag trigger will
be commanded based on the characteris-
tics of this pressure rise.
WARNING
This car is equipped with side airbags
and no extra interior trim should be fit-
ted. Failure to observe this warning
could result in the side airbags not
inflating as intended and thus not pro-
viding the intended protection either.
Never place any object in the area that
would be occupied by the inflated air-
bag.
For optimum protection, sit upright in
the seat, with your safety belt correctly
fastened.
The sensors for the side airbags are
fitted in the front doors. We advise
against doing any work on the doors
that could affect the moisture barrier in
the door or the airbag sensors. It is
essential that the moisture barrier
(thick plastic film) in the front door is
not damaged in any way.
Improvement of the anticorrosion tre-
atment of the doors should only be
carried out by an authorized Saab
dealer. Otherwise there is a risk that
the side impact sensor and the mois-
ture barrier in the front door could be
damaged.
The side airbags will inflate only in the
event of a side impact; not in the event
of a front or rear-end crash or of the
car’s rolling over.
Damage or wear to the seat cover, or
the seat seam, in the area of the side
airbag must immediately be repaired
by an authorized Saab dealer.
Do not modify the speaker installation
in the front doors or install speakers
other than those specifically approved
by Saab.
33Safety
AIRBAG warning light
WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. See page 55. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash,
or they could even inflate without a
crash.
To help avoid injury to yourself or oth-
ers, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle.
IB1182
Side airbag inflated
IB1707
Side airbag components
1 Side airbag
2 Sensor
3 Moisture barrier
4 Text on seat
34 Safety
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even
realize the airbag inflated. Some compo-
nents of the airbag module - the steering
wheel hub for the driver's frontal airbag, the
instrument panel for the right front passen-
ger's frontal airbag or the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows - will be hot
for a short time. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There will be some
smoke and dust coming from the vents in
the deflated airbags. airbag inflation does
not prevent the driver from seeing or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield break-
age may also occur from the right front pas-
senger airbag.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need
some new parts for your airbag system. If
you do not get them, the airbag system
will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts.
The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sen-
sing and diagnostic module which
records information after a crash. See
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 249.
Let only qualified technicians work on
your airbag system. Improper service can
mean that your airbag system will not
work properly. See your dealer for ser-
vice.
WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble. To
avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should
get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but cannot get
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or
a door. If you experience breathing prob-
lems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
WARNING
If you damage the covering for the driver's
or the right front passenger's airbag, or
the side impact airbag covering on the
ceiling near the side windows, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to
replace the airbag module in the steering
wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front pas-
senger's airbag, or side impact airbag
module and ceiling covering for the
roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings.
35Safety
AIRBAG servicing
The airbag must be inspected as part of the
normal service program but otherwise may
be regarded as maintenance-free.
Scrapping or working on airbags
and belt pretensioners
Frequently asked questions on
function of airbags
Do you still need to wear a
safety b
elt if air-
bags are fitted?
Yes, always! The airbag merely supple-
ments the car’s normal safety system.
Moreover, the airbag will only be actuated in
a moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, which means, of course, that it provi-
des no protection in minor frontal crashes,
major rear-end or side-on crashes or if the
car rolls over.
The safety belts help reduce the chance of
the car occupants from being thrown around
and injured or killed inside the car.
But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs
in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag
will make the optimum contact with the
occupant, i.e. square on from the front. If the
occupant meets the airbag in an offset posi-
tion, the protection afforded will be reduced.
In addition, airbags provide no protection
against a secondary impact occurring in the
same incident. So there is no doubt about
the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
times.
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
room to inflate.
The airbag inflates very quickly and power-
fully in order to protect an adult person,
before they are thrown forward, in a serious
frontal crash.
WARNING
Under no circumstances should any
modifications be made that affect the
steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-
cal circuitry.
Before starting any welding work on
the car, always disconnect the nega-
tive (–) battery lead and cover the con-
ductor.
Airbags and belt pretensioners must
be deployed under controlled condi-
tions before the car is scrapped or any
of the system’s components are remo-
ved. Airbags or belt pretensioners that
have been deployed as a result of a
crash must be replaced by new ones.
Airbag-system components must
never be transferred for use in another
vehicle.
All work involving the scrapping or
replacement of airbags or belt preten-
sioners must only be carried out by
knowledgeable personnel.
The headlining and roof pillar trim
must not be modified in any way. Work
on these areas must only be carried
out at a Saab dealer.
36 Safety
How do I position the seat to leave room for
the airbag to inflate?
Don’t have your seat too far forward.
Recline the seat back to increase the dis-
tance between you and the airbag. For short
drivers, special accessory pedal extensions
are available through your Saab dealer.
Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
great force – to be fast enough to protect an
adult in the seat.
When do the front airbags inflate?
The airbag will only be inflated under certain
predetermined conditions in a moderate to
severe frontal, or near-frontal crash, depen-
ding on such factors as the force and angle
of the impact, the speed of the car on
impact, and the resistance to deformation of
the impacting object.
The airbag can only be activated once in the
same incident.
Do not attempt to drive the car after an
airbag has been inflated, even if it is
possible.
What won’t trigger the front airbags?
The airbag will not be activated in all
front-end crashes. For instance, if the car
has hit something relatively soft and yielding
(e.g. a snow drift or a hedge) or a solid
object at a low impact speed, the airbag will
not necessarily be triggered.
How loud is the inflation?
The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
but it is very short-lived and will not damage
your hearing. For a short time afterwards
you could experience a buzzing noise in
your ears.
Most people who have experienced it
cannot remember the noise of the inflation
at all – all they remember is the noise of the
crash.
Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
passenger airbag is installed?
Definitely not!
Children 12 and under or shorter than
55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the
airbag.
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for
children.
NEVER put a child seat in the front.
Sit as far back as possible from the airbag.
Always use safety belts and child res-
traints.
Are the smoke and fumes given off when the
airbag operates at all harmful?
Most people who have remained in a car
with little or no ventilation for several minu-
tes complained only of minor irritation of the
throat and eyes. Avoid as far as possible
getting dust on your skin as there is a risk of
skin irritation.
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
bring on an attack, in which case you should
follow the normal procedure advised by
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
doctor afterwards.
What should I do if the AIRBAG warning
light comes on?
If the warning light is on, it means that a fault
has been detected in the system. The
airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
intended and it might even be activated
erroneously. You should therefore take the
car to an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
possible.
37Security
Doors ________________ 38
Central locking ________ 38
Car alarm _____________ 44
IB446
Security
38 Security
Doors
Door handles
Pull the handle to open the door.
If the door is stuck (e.g. if frozen), hold the
handle from above to secure a better grip.
Central locking
Key / Remote control
The key unit consists of a mechanical key
with integrated remote control.
The mechanical key is used for manual
locking and unlocking.
The remote control is used for remote lock-
ing and unlocking.
The key fits all the car’s locks.
The key supplied with the car has a code
number on a black plastic tag that needs to
be quoted for ordering additional keys. You
should therefore make a careful note of the
number.
The key contains a unique electronic code
for your car. When the key is inserted in the
ignition, the code is checked. If it matches,
the car can be started.
Your car is supplied with two keys. It is pos-
sible to have up to four keys for a car at one
time. If you loose one key you should have
this replaced as soon as possible by contac-
ting your Saab dealer. When the new key is
programmed into the system, the missing
key is automatically erased.
NOTE: For this reason, we strongly advise
you to take two keys with you on long jour-
neys and to keep them separate. If all keys
are lost, it will be necessary to replace costly
electronic components as well as the keys.
This loss and replacement cost is not cove-
red by the new car warranty.
If an additional key is to be added, all of the
original keys must be brought to the dealer
so that the control module can ”learn” to
recognize the new components.
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also
dangerous to leave children in a vehicle
with the ignition key. A child or others
could be badly injured or even killed.
Key / Remote control
1To lock
2 To unlock
3 Opening the trunk (9-5 Sedan)
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 SportWagon)
IB3153
3 2
1
39Security
To check the number of keys that are pro-
grammed for the car; see page 48.
Locking/unlocking the car
When the car is locked and unlocked the
theft alarm is also affected.
Remote locking (1)
Press once on the control: all doors
locked.
The hazard warning lights will flash once.
The trunk/tailgate release switch on the dri-
ver´s door will not work when all doors are
locked.
Remote unlocking (2)
Press once on the control: the driver´s
door is unlocked. Press a second time to
unlock the rest of the doors.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice.
If remote unlocking should fail to work
Unlock the front door with the key. To
silence the alarm, insert the key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to the ON position.
The car can now be started. Contact your
local Saab dealer to have the system
checked and repaired.
NOTICE
The key contains delicate electronics.
Do not expose it to water.
Avoid rough handling.
Do not place the key where it may be
subjected to high temperatures, e.g.
on the instrument panel.
The key may malfunction if it becomes
very cold. Warm it in your hands for a
couple of minutes.
Never open the key. For changing the
battery, see page 41.
WARNING
The remote control also works from inside
the car. Therefore, hold the key in such a
way that the buttons are not unintentio-
nally pressed when the key is turned, or
inserted or removed from the ignition
switch.
Otherwise, the doors may be unintentio-
nally locked or the tailgate unlocked. On
Sedan models, the trunk may even be
opened.
IB3154
Locking/unlocking by remote control.
1To lock
2 To unlock
40 Security
Locking by key (1)
When the car is locked and unlocked the
theft alarm is also affected.
Turn the key clockwise: all doors locked.
The trunk/tailgate release switch on the dri-
ver’s door will not work when all doors are
locked.
Unlocking by key (2)
Turn the key counterclockwise once: the dri-
ver´s door will unlock.
Turn the key counterclockwise twice: all
doors, but not trunk lid/tailgate, unlocked.
The central locking can also be operated
from inside the car by means of the
switch on the center console.
To lock all doors: press the symbol side of
the switch once.
To unlock the driver´s door: press the
switch once.
To unlock all doors: press the switch
twice.
This switch is inoperative when the car is
locked from the outside using the remote
control.
The interior locking buttons on each door
affect only the respective door.
If the car is left with the doors open, the inte-
rior lighting and the courtesy lights in the
doors will be switched off automatically after
20 minutes, to prevent a drain on the bat-
tery. In such cases the electrically operated
seats will not function.
WARNING
Having the doors locked when you are
driving will reduce the likelihood of:
Passengers, especially children, ope-
ning doors and falling out of the car.
Intruders entering the car when it is
moving slowly or at a standstill.
Injury resulting from a door bursting
open in the event of a crash.
However, you must also remember that
locked doors can hamper rescuers in the
event of a crash.
IB451
Switch for operation of central locking
IB1555
2
1
Locking/unlocking by key
1To lock
2 To unlock
41Security
Child safety locks
The rear doors are equipped with child
safety locks that are operated by means of
a catch adjacent to the door lock.
Insert a key and turn the catch 45° clockwise
or counterclockwise as indicated by the
label on the door.
When the child safety catch is in the locked
position, the door cannot be opened from
the inside.
Changing the key battery
When the battery voltage in the key falls
below a predetermined level the Saab Infor-
mation Display (SID) will issue the following
message:
”Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.”
Press the CLEAR button on the SID to ack-
nowledge this message. You must then
replace the battery without delay to avoid
malfunctions. The life of the battery is nor-
mally 4 years.Contact a Saab dealer to
have the battery replaced.
WARNING
If small children ride in the rear seats, the
safety locks on rear doors should be acti-
vated to prevent unintentional opening
from the inside.
IB1871
Child safety lock on rear doors
42 Security
Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan
The trunk lid lock is independent of the cen-
tral-locking system. The trunk lid release
switch on the driver’s door is inoperative
when the car is locked from the outside or
moving at a speed greater than 2.7 mph
(4 km/h).
Unlocking
The trunk lid is unlocked using:
The button on the key
The trunk lid switch on the inside of the
driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at
a standstill)
Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direc-
tion indicators flashing three times.
The trunk lid switch on the driver’s door is
inoperative when the car is locked.
Locking
The trunk lid release is locked automatically
when closed.
Trunk Release Handle
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from the inside.
NOTICE
The trunk release handle was not desig-
ned to be used to tie down the trunk lid or
as a an anchor point when securing items
in the trunk. Improper use of the trunk
release could damage it.
IB1833
Trunk Release HandleTrunk lid switch
43Security
Tailgate, 9-5 SportWagon
The tailgate is not unlocked when the other
car doors are unlocked. The tailgate button
on the driver’s door is inoperative when the
car is locked or moving at a speed greater
than 2.7 mph (4 km/h).
Unlocking
The tailgate is unlocked using:
The button on the key
The tailgate switch on the inside of the dri-
ver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at a
standstill)
Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direc-
tion indicators flashing three times.
Locking
The tailgate is locked using:
The button on the key
The button on the centre console
The key in the driver’s door.
When vehicle speed exceeds 2 mph
(4 km/h).
Electronic starting interlock
(immobilizer)
Each time the key is removed from the igni-
tion, the electronic starting interlock is acti-
vated and the car is thus immobilized, see
also page 45.
Reprogramming lock system
functions
Certain lock system functions can be repro-
grammed by your authorized Saab dealer;
see page 264.
NOTICE
Use the grab handle to assist in closing
the tailgate.
Avoid the following, due to the risk of lock
mechanism damage when the tailgate is
closed.
Never grasp the lock mechanism as
this can lock the mechanism.
Never close the lock mechanism
manually.
IB3160
Grab handle
44 Security
Car alarm
The car alarm (anti-theft system) is acti-
vated/deactivated when the car is
locked/unlocked by the remote control or by
the key, see page 39.
The antenna for the alarm system is located
in the center console.
All the doors plus trunk lid/tailgate and hood
are monitored by microswitches.
Your Saab 9-5 is equipped with an Electro-
nic starting interlock (immobilizer), see
page 45 for details.
The car alarm is armed 10 seconds after the
car has been locked by the remote control.
During this ten-second delay period, the
doors, trunk lid/tailgate and hood may still
be opened without the alarm being trigge-
red.
The LED indicator on the instrument panel
fascia will be on continuously during this
period, at the end of which it will start to flash
(once every other second).
If a door or the trunk lid/tailgate or hood has
been left open when the car is locked, the
LED on the fascia will flash (three times per
second) for ten seconds to indicate this.
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also
dangerous to leave children in a vehicle
with the ignition key. A child or others
could be badly injured or even killed.
IB3153
3 2
1
Remote control
1 Activate/lock
2 Deactivate/unlock
3 Unlock trunk/tailgate
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 SportWagon)
45Security
Check to ensure that all the doors, plus
trunk lid/tailgate and hood, are closed pro-
perly.
If the fault persists (LED flashing when
another attempt is made to activate the car
alarm by remote control), lock the car using
the key instead. The car alarm will not have
been activated and you should contact an
authorized Saab dealer.
To avoid inconvenience caused by the
alarm being triggered inadvertently, make
sure that anyone else using the car is fami-
liar with how both the car alarm and the lock-
ing system work.
If the alarm is tripped (the direction indica-
tors are flashing and the horn is on) it can be
turned off by unlocking the car using the
button.
Activating the car alarm
The car alarm cannot be activated if the dri-
ver’s door is open or if the ignition switch is
in ON position.
If one of the other doors or the trunk or hood
is open or opened and not closed again
during the 10-second delay period, it will be
excluded from the alarm function.
If it is then closed, a new delay period of ten
seconds will start, and the door (or trunk or
hood) will once again be secured by the
alarm system.
As usual, the LED will be on continuously
during the new delay period and will start to
flash once every other second after the
10-second period has elapsed.
Electronic starting interlock
(immobilizer)
When the key is inserted in the ignition, a
signal is sent to the receiver. If the signal is
verified, the engine can be started.
Each time the key is removed from the igni-
tion, the electronic immobilizer is activated.
This means that the car cannot be started
without the correct key inserted in the igni-
tion and the immobilizer thus deactivated.
If a fault is detected (e.g. in the transmitter)
”Key not accepted.
Contact service.”
will appear on the Saab Information Display
(SID).
In this case, you can still start the car if you
turn the ignition key to ON and press one of
the buttons on the key (providing that the
receiver gets the right signal from the key).
Take the car to an authorized Saab dealer
to have the system checked.
The LED double-flashes when the car is
immobilized.
46 Security
Alarm signals
When the car alarm is armed, it will be trig-
gered if any door, or the trunk lid or hood, is
opened.
The alarm will also be triggered if an attempt
is made to bypass or short-circuit the igni-
tion switch, or to disconnect the battery.
If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
signals will be set off:
Flashing of hazard warning lights for five
minutes.
Horn wailing for 30 seconds.
The alarm signals will stop if the alarm is
deactivated (car unlocked) during the alarm
period.
Panic-function
In the car alarm system there is a feature
called "Panic-function".
To activate panic function:
Push and hold one of the buttons on the
key for 2 seconds. Or, if you are sitting
inside the car, push the LOCK-switch on
the center console for 2 seconds.
These actions will trigger the alarm (hazard
warning lights and horn).
To deactivate panic function:
Push one of the buttons on the key, push
the LOCK-switch in the center console,
turn the key in the driver´s door or turn the
ignition to ON.
When the panic-function is activated the car
will be locked/unlocked depending upon
which button was pushed.
When the ignition is ON the panic-function
cannot be activated.
47Security
Overview of functions
Alarm signals may differ between model variants for different
countries.
Some of the car-alarm functions can be reprogrammed – con-
sult your Saab dealer for further details (see page 264).
Locking/
activation
Hazard warning lights flash once.
The LED will come on for 10 seconds.
Unlocking/
deactivation
Hazard warning lights flash twice.
The LED will come on for two seconds.
Unlocking/
deactivation of
trunk lid/tailgate
alarm
Hazard warning lights flash three times.
The LED will flash three times per second for
10 seconds.
Alarm triggered Hazard warning lights flash for 5 min.
Horn wails for 30 seconds.
To switch off the alarm, deactivate the system in
the normal way (unlocking).
Key The range of the key is normally 5–10 yds. (5–
10 metres), although it can be substantially more
than this in ideal conditions (range can vary gre-
atly depending on the position of the car and its
surroundings).
If the key is not working, it may be because the
code signal has not been synchronized with that
in the control module for the car alarm. To rectify
this, press the unlock button on the key at least
four times in quick succession. When it is recog-
nized, the door locks will cycle.
If a key is lost, the new one will have to be pro-
grammed (all keys must be present) to match the
car’s unique security code. Contact an author-
ized Saab dealer.
Battery for key The battery for the key will normally have a life of
4 years. When the battery needs changing,
”Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.”
will appear on the Saab Information Display
(SID).
Contact an authorized Saab dealer.
Car-battery
voltage
If the battery is disconnected while the alarm is
active (car is locked), for example during an
attempt to steal the car, the alarm will be
triggered.
48 Security
Overview of LED signals and SID messages
Some signals may differ between model variants for different
countries.
Status LED signal
Activation (during 10-second delay). Comes on for 10 seconds.
Alarm activated (after delay). Flashes once every other
second.
Deactivation. Comes on for 2 seconds.
Alarm not activated. Off.
Door, trunk lid/tailgate or hood open
or opened during delay period.
Flashes three times per
second for 10 seconds.
Unlocking the trunk lid/tailgate. Flashes three times per
second for 10 seconds.
Closing of door, trunk lid/tailgate or
hood after delay period.
Comes on for 10 seconds.
Car immobilized but not locked.
Car alarm not activated.
Flashes twice at three
seconds intervals.
Fault in a switch serving doors, hood
or trunk lid.
Flashing (instead of being
on continuously) during
delay period.
SID message Reason/action
Theft protection failure.
Contact service.
Probably a fault in one of the sensors
or the horn.
Have the car checked by an authori-
zed Saab dealer.
Key not accepted.
Contact service.
Fault in key transmitter or in igni-
tion-switch receiver.
Turn ignition switch to ON and press
the unlock button on the key. Start
the engine.
Have the car checked by an authori-
zed Saab dealer.
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
Fit a new battery in the key, see
page 41.
• REMOTE KEY
• TRANSPONDR
Turn the ignition key to position ON
and then press the button for ope-
ning the trunk lid. Saab Information
Display (SID) displays the number of
keys and transmitters (transponders)
coded to the car.
49Security
Canada only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manu-
facturer could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
50 Security
(This page has been left blank)
51Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning
lights _______________ 52
Instruments ___________ 58
Saab Information Display
(SID) ________________ 61
Switches _____________ 67
Automatic climate control
(ACC) _______________ 73
AUTO
ECON OFF
AUTO
…F
…C
…F
…C
ECON OFF
CLEAR
CLEAR
SET
VOL
TRE
BALON
FADBAS
PULLPUSH
AS
SEARCH
213
546
DOLBY B NR
Instruments and controls
52 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning
lights
A number of indicator and warning lights will
come on when the ignition is switched on
prior to starting. Under normal conditions,
these should go out a few seconds after the
engine has started (see page 58).
This light will come on and a chime will
sound if a fault has been detected in any
system that is critical to safety. Any of the
following can activate the central warning
light and alarm:
Airbag system.
Low oil pressure in engine.
Parking brake is on (when car is moving).
Brake fluid level low.
Fault detected in ABS system.
Electronic brake force distribution (distri-
bution of brake pressure between front
and rear wheels).
Engine overheating.
Alternator not charging properly.
Central warning light
Main instrument panel
1 Tachometer
2 Indicator and warning lights
3 Speedometer
4 Indicator and warning lights
5 Pressure gauge
6 Fuel gauge
7 Engine temperature gauge
8 Trip meter reset button
9 Odometer and trip meter
U.S. shown, Canada similar
53Instruments and controls
This light will come on together with if
the engine oil pressure is dangerously low.
If the light flashes or comes on while you are
driving, stop the car, switch off the engine
and check the engine oil level (see
page 186).
This light will come on together with if
the battery is discharging. If it comes on
while you are driving, stop the car as soon
as possible and switch off the engine.
Check the alternator drive belt (see
page 194). If the belt has broken, the engine
may overheat (cooling system will not func-
tion properly), the battery will not be char-
ged, the A/C compressor will not run and
power assistance for the steering will be
lost.
This light will come on together with if
there is insufficient brake fluid in the reser-
voir (see pages 189).
If the ABS warning light is on at the same
time, the ABS system may be inoperative
because of a fault (see ”Anti-lock brake war-
ning”, page 54).
Warning, oil pressure
(engine oil)
NOTICE
Under no circumstances must the car be
driven when this warning light is on. Low
oil pressure can result in serious engine
damage.
Warning, charging Brake warning light
WARNING
Never drive the car when these warning
lights are on. Danger of brake failure!
Have the brake system checked at once
by an authorized Saab dealer.
54 Instruments and controls
This light will show when the parking brake
is on (see page 179).
If the car is driven with the parking brake still
on, will also come on and a chime will
sound.
The parking brake is mechanical and opera-
tes on the rear wheels.
This light will come on if a fault has occurred
in the ABS system.
On certain variants and as well
as can light up to indicate a fault in the
electronic brake force distribution system
(distribution of the brake pressure between
the front and rear wheels).
Conventional braking without the ABS func-
tion will still be available.
For safety reasons, stop the car and check
the level of the brake fluid (see page 189).
If the level is normal, depress the brake
pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
the level again. If the level is still normal, you
may drive the car, with considerable cau-
tion, to the nearest authorized Saab dealer
to have the brake system checked.
Parking brake warning
light
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when
parking, see page 179.
Always apply the parking brake
before removing the ignition key.
•Do not apply the parking brake while
the car is moving.
Anti-lock brake warning
WARNING
If the ABS is inoperative, there is a
danger of the rear wheels locking up
on hard braking.
If the level of brake fluid in the reser-
voir is below the MIN mark, the car
should be towed to an authorized
Saab dealer.
55Instruments and controls
This light together with will come on if
a potentially serious fault has occurred in
the airbag system.
The light will come on for about three
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the Start or Drive position. It should go out
after the engine has started.
This light indicates a malfunction in the
fuel-injection or ignition system. The car
may still be driven with care and with
somewhat diminished performance (see
page 136).
This light comes on when there is less than
about 2.5 gallons (10 liters) of fuel left in the
tank.
This light indicates that there is a message
in the Saab Information Display (SID). A
chime will also sound (see page 64).
Airbag warning light
WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. One or more of the following
conditions may occur:
Non-deployment of the airbags in the
event of a crash.
Deployment of the airbags without a
crash.
Deployment of the airbags in crashes
less severe than intended.
To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)
WARNING
An illuminated ”Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indica-
tes an engine-related problem. While
your car may be able to be driven with the
”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
indicator light illuminated (Limp-home
mode), you are advised to have your car
serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as
soon as possible.
Continued driving without this problem
being corrected might cause serious
further damage to your car and create
unsafe driving conditions. The driver
should be prepared to take action if such
unsafe conditions arise (e.g.brake
smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suita-
ble place, switch off the engine, etc.).
NOTICE
The car should be checked immediately
at an authorized Saab dealer to prevent
more serious faults from arising.
Indicator, fuel
NOTICE
If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.
CHECK message indicator
56 Instruments and controls
This light shows when the cruise-control
system is active (see page 151).
This light shows when the headlights are on
high beam (see page 67).
This light shows when the rear fog light is on
(see page 68).
The rear fog light is switched off automat-
ically when the engine is switched off. When
the fog light is next needed, it will have to be
switched on manually again.
The rear fog light consists of one light so it
should not be mistaken for brake lights.
This light indicates that there is a fault in the
Xenon headlight system, which consists of
xenon headlights and an automatic levelling
system.
If a fault arises in the Xenon headlight sys-
tem, the headlights will be angled down to
avoid impairing the vision of drivers in onco-
ming traffic. Adjust your speed accordingly
as visibility will be reduced.
If a door has not been closed properly, the
pictogram will indicate the door concerned
(or tailgate).
This light will come on in cars with automatic
transmission when the S (SPORT) button
on the selector lever has been pressed
(position N or D) see page 150.
In this mode, the gear changes occur later,
at higher engine revs, giving the engine and
transmission a sportier feel.
To cancel the SPORT mode, press the S
button on the selector lever again. The
mode is also deselected automatically
when the selector lever is moved to P, R, M
or L, or when the ignition is switched off.
Indicator, cruise control
Indicator, high beam
Indicator, rear fog light
Xenon headlight fault
indicator
(if equipped)
NOTICE
If the Xenon headlight fault indicator lights
up, have your car checked as soon as
possible at an authorized Saab dealer.
If you do not rectify the problem, nighttime
visibility will be poor since the range of the
headlights is reduced.
Indicator, open door
Indicator, SPORT-mode
automatic transmission
57Instruments and controls
On a car with an automatic transmission,
this warning symbol is illuminated if a fault
has been detected in the transmission.
Switch the ignition off and on again to check
if the fault persists.
Even if the fault persists, it is still possible in
most cases to drive the car (see page 146).
Have the automatic transmission checked
by an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
possible.
The indicator light goes on when the Elec-
tronic Stability Program is switched off with
the ESP-button.
IMPORTANT: the system is automatically
engaged every time the engine is started
(see page 155).
The indicator light also goes on when there
is a fault in the system. In this case the light
cannot be turned off by means of the ESP
button. If a fault is indicated, have the
system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
See also “Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) on page 155.
The ESP indicator light is located in the
tachometer and will be illuminated when
ESP regulation is occurring, i.e. when there
is insufficient traction between the tires and
the road surface to provide the grip required
for the acceleration called for. The driver
can also sense that the engine is not
responding normally to the accelerator.
Operation of the ESP indicates reduced
traction between the tires and the road, and
that extra care should be taken by the driver.
In normal driving, the ESP will help to
improve both ride comfort and safety, but
must not be regarded as a system to enable
the driver to drive at or maintain a higher
rate of speed. The same precautions for
safe cornering and driving on slippery roads
must still be applied (see page 155).
Automatic transmission,
fault indicator
NOTICE
If the control module has actuated the
Limp-home function for the automatic
transmission, the car will remain in 5th
gear when D is selected, making it very
sluggish. To overcome this, select posi-
tion L to prevent unnecessary wear on the
transmission. The transmission then
starts in 2nd gear. When the car is moving
you can select position D.
When the indicator light is on, the car
must not be driven with a trailer attached.
Indicator ESP OFF Indicator ESP
58 Instruments and controls
Autochecking of lights,
main instrument panel
The above warning and indicator lights
should come on when the ignition is swit-
ched on prior to starting. They should go out
after about 3 seconds.
The following lights light up until the engine
is started, presuming that no fault exists:
Central warning light .
Oil pressure warning light .
Warning, charging .
Instruments
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute. The
needle may be allowed to enter the broken
red zone on the dial only for an instant.
A safety cut-out function (in the fuel system)
prevents the engine speed from exceeding
approximately 6,000 rpm.
Odometer and trip meter
The odometer records the distance traveled
in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Canadian
vehicles the distance indicated is in kilome-
tres, and the trip meter in miles and tenths
(kilometres and tenths of kilometres on
Canadian vehicles).
Reset button
The reset button has two functions, determi-
ned by whether the ignition is ON or OFF.
When the ignition is ON, pressing the
button will reset the trip meter.
When the ignition is OFF, the display
lights up for 20 seconds enabling you to
read the odometer and trip meter. Pres-
sing the button a second time within these
20 seconds will reset the trip meter.
IB1922
IB340
IB341
1 Cars with automatic transmission
59Instruments and controls
Speedometer
(U.S. speedometer shown)
The speedometer receives signals from the
wheel sensors in the ABS system.
If the NIGHT PANEL mode has been selec-
ted, the scale will be illuminated up to 87
mph (140 km/h). The remainder of the scale
will be illuminated if the speed of the car
exceeds 84 mph (135 km/h).
Fuel gauge
Fuel-tank capacity, 18.5 US gal. (70 liters).
The fuel gauge shows the amount of fuel left
in the tank. When this is down to about
2.5 gal. (10 liters), a warning light on the
main instrument panel will come on (see
page 55).
Use the Saab Information display (SID) to
check the approximate distance that can be
traveled on the remaining fuel
(see page 61).
Temperature gauge
The temperature gauge shows the tempe-
rature of the coolant. The needle should be
in the middle of the scale when the engine
is at normal operating temperature.
If the needle approaches the red zone,
which can occur in very hot weather or when
the engine is under a heavy load, drive in the
highest gear possible, keep the engine revs
low and avoid shifting down.
If the needle enters the red zone, the
warning light will come on and an alarm
chime will sound.
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
240
260
220
200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
10
IB1851
IB345
IB343
60 Instruments and controls
Check fuse 1 (radiator fan) in the fuse panel
under the hood, see page 215.
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone,
stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and
check the coolant level by looking at the
level visible through the plastic tank – do not
remove the cap.
If the coolant level falls below the MIN mark,
the Saab Information Display (SID) will dis-
play the message
”Coolant level low.
Refill.”.
Pressure gauge
The turbo gauge indicates the air volume for
combustion, which is equivalent to the
engine load.
At low loads, the needle will move within the
white zone. At higher loads and during
heavy acceleration, the needle will enter the
yellow area. At very high loads or under cer-
tain barometric conditions, the needle may
enter the first part of the red zone without
indicating that there is a fault.
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
and the engine at the same time loses
power, because the monitoring system is
holding the charging pressure down, you
should contact an authorized Saab dealer.
If the speed exceeds 149 mph/240 km/h
(155 mph/250 km/h, 9-5 Aero) the increase
in speed will be limited by the lowering of the
boost pressure. The pressure gauge then
moves towards the middle of the orange
zone, indicating reduced engine output and
thus reduces the speed of the car as well.
NOTICE
If the needle, despite the above action,
enters the red zone, stop the car immedi-
ately, let the engine idle.
If the needle stays in the red zone, stop
the engine.
WARNING
Never open the cap of the expansion tank
completely when the engine is hot, open
with care. The pressure in the coo-
ling-system can cause hot coolant and
steam to be released. Failure to heed this
warning may result in personal injury.
IB344
61Instruments and controls
Selector lever indication
(Automatic transmission)
The position of the selector lever is indica-
ted on the main instrument panel. If manual
mode is selected, the current gear is also
displayed.
Saab Information
Display (SID)
The Saab Information Display (SID) shows
CHECK messages and incorporates eight
trip-computer functions.
The SID is also used by the Audio System.
Trip computer
Selecting the function
Use the button to scroll down through
the following functions and use the
button to scroll back up through the func-
tions:
Use the button to scroll through the
following functions:
WARNING
It is strongly recommended that the SID
settings be changed only when the car is
stationary. The driver’s attention can oth-
erwise easily be distracted from the road.
Dist Distance to destination / Trip
meter.
Arriv Estimated time of arrival.
Alarm Alarm function.
Speed W Speed warning (chime).
Date Date, month and year
Temp. Outdoor temperature and Date.
D.T.E. Estimated range (distance to
empty fuel tank).
Fuel Average fuel consumption
since function last reset.
Speed Average speed since function
last reset.
CLEAR
SET
NIGHT PANEL
IB3084
62 Instruments and controls
Outdoor temperature
(Frost warning)
Regardless of which function has been
selected, except Night Panel Mode, SID will
automatically display the outdoor tempera-
ture when it is between 26° and 38°F (–3°
and +3°C). This also applies if the
temperature has moved outside the range
of 21° to 43°F (–6° to +6°C) but is again bet-
ween 26° and 38°F (–3° and +3°C).
Entering values for the functions
Values can be entered for the following
functions: Speed , Dist, Arriv, Alarm and
Speed W.
1 Select the desired function using
or .
2 Press the SET button for at least one
second (figures start to flash and a
chime sounds).
3 Use or to increase or
decrease the value (press CLEAR to
reset).
4 Press SET to record the value.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated
using the values for fuel consumed and dis-
tance driven since last reset. This value is
stored in the car’s trip computer even when
the engine is switched off.
Select Fuel Ø with .
To reset the value, press the CLEAR button
for 4 seconds. A chime will be heard and
CLEARED will be displayed.
Setting the date
1 Use to select Date.
2 Press the SET button for at least one
second (year starts to flash and a chime
sounds).
3 Set the year using or .
4 Touch SET.
5 Set the month in the same way.
6 Touch SET.
7 Set the day in the same way.
8 Press SET to save the date setting.
WARNING
Remember that roads can be icy even at
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
especially on bridges and stretches of
road that are sheltered from the sun.
63Instruments and controls
Turning the Alarm and Speed
warning on or off
1 Select the Alarm or Speed-warning
function.
2 Press SET to turn on the function.
Press CLEAR to turn off the function.
When either function is on, Alarm/Speed W
respectively will be visible on the display. An
asterisk
* will be visible on the right of the
display when either function is selected.
The Alarm and Speed-warning settings will
not be cancelled when the engine is swit-
ched off.
When the Alarm has been set to come on at
a specified time, it will only be activated
once – it will not come on at the same time
every day. Press SET to turn it on again.
The Alarm will continue to beep for one
minute if not switched off.
Calculation of arrival time and
average speed
The settings must be made before the jour-
ney is started.
Calculation of arrival time:
1 Select Dist using the button.
2 Set the destination distance.
3 Press SET.
When Arriv. is selected during the journey,
the arrival time based on the average speed
over the past 20 minutes will be displayed.
The trip computer will include any stops in
the calculation of the estimated time of
arrival.
Press Dist and the distance remaining to the
destination will be displayed in the same
way.
After the distance to destination has
decreased to zero, the Dist will function as
a trip meter (see ”Using Dist as a trip
meter”). The starting value for the trip meter
will be the last distance set in the Dist
function.
Example: The Dist setting was 100 miles.
Once 100 miles (160 km) has been cove-
red, the Dist will start to function as a trip
meter, starting at the initial setting of
100 miles (160 km).
Using Dist as a trip meter
If no value has been set for the Dist function,
Dist will now function as a trip meter (indica-
ted by an arrow on the far right of the dis-
play).
Press CLEAR to reset the trip meter.
Under 1000 miles the distance will be
shown in increments of 0.1 miles,
there-after, the reading will change in incre-
ments of 1.0 mile.
Metric units: for just under a kilometer, the
distance will be shown in increments of
10 meters, there-after, the reading will
change in increments of 100 meters.
When Dist is functioning as a trip meter, the
Arriv function will display the current time.
64 Instruments and controls
To calculate the arrival time if a specified
average speed is maintained
1 Select Dist using the button.
2 Set the distance to be covered.
3 Press to select Speed Ø.
4 Set the average speed you intend to
drive.
5 Press SET to display the estimated arri-
val time.
At the beginning of a journey, the Speed Ø
and Arriv functions will display current
values. If values are set during the journey,
the new values will be displayed after a
delay of about 10 seconds.
Calculating the requisite average speed:
1 Press to select Dist.
2 Set the distance to be covered.
3 Press to select Arriv.
4 Set the desired arrival time.
5 Press SET to display the average speed
you need to maintain to arrive at the
desired time.
At the beginning of a journey, the Speed Ø
and Arriv functions will display current
values. If values are set during the journey,
the new values will be displayed after a
delay of about 10 seconds.
Resetting values
To reset the values, press CLEAR for at
least four seconds.
The following functions will be reset
simultaneously:
Estimated range on remaining fuel
(function based on a fuel consumption of
28 mpg).
Average fuel consumption.
Average speed.
Arrival time (function based on current
speed).
Programmed values for Dist, Alarm and
Speed W will not be reset (see the respec-
tive function).
CHECK messages
When the engine is started, CHECKING will
appear on the display for about four
seconds, while the SID checks are being
performed.
When a CHECK message is generated
while the car is being driven, a chime will
sound, INFO DISPL will illuminate on the
main instrument panel, and the message
will appear on the SID. The number of mes-
sages that can be displayed by the SID
varies with the specification of the car.
If more than one CHECK message has
been generated, the
+ symbol will appear to
the left of the text on the display. The mes-
sages appear in order of priority.
If a new fault occurs while another message
is being displayed, the message relating to
the new one will appear for 10 seconds,
after which the display will return to the ear-
lier one.
Press CLEAR once to acknowledge a mes-
sage, whereupon it will be cleared from the
display. It will not be displayed again before
the ignition has been switched off and then
on again.
65Instruments and controls
The following messages may be displayed:
1) This message will be displayed approximately
600 miles (1,000 km) before the next scheduled
service is due, or when 365 days have elapsed
since the last service. The message should be
cleared at the time of that service (see the Saab
Warranties & Service Record Booklet).
This message can also be deleted by first briefly
pressing the CLEAR button, then depressing it a
second time for at least eight seconds until
”SERVICE” appears on the display and a chime
sounds. The message can only be deleted when
it is shown on the SID.
Night panel
To improve night-driving conditions inside
the car, the Night Panel mode can be selec-
ted. In this mode, the amount of information
displayed is reduced, and only the most
important instruments and displays will be
illuminated.
When the Night Panel button is pressed,
only the speedometer will be illuminated (up
to the 87-mph or 140-km/h graduation), all
the other instruments illumination being ext-
inguished and their needles moved to zero.
Both the SID and the ACC displays will be
extinguished and the backlighting for swit-
ches and other controls will be dimmed.
Note: All indicator and warning lights,
together with the display of CHECK messa-
ges, will operate as normal, except ”Out-
door temperature”, see page 62.
The following conditions will wake up the
respective displays in the Night-Panel
mode:
Setting of the Audio system, SID or ACC
(display comes on for ten seconds).
CHECK message generated in the SID.
High engine revs cause the rev counter to
be illuminated until the engine speed has
fallen again.
If the quantity of fuel remaining falls below
4 gallons (15 liters), the fuel gauge will be
illuminated.
If the engine temperature rises above nor-
mal, the temperature gauge will be illumi-
nated.
If the speed of the car exceeds 84 mph
(135 km/h), the entire speedometer will
be illuminated.
In cars with automatic transmission, if the
selector lever is moved from D to position
M or L, the selector indication on the main
instrument panel will be illuminated.
To restore the displays and lighting to the
normal mode, press the Night-Panel button.
Message See
page
Fog light failure. 198
Rear light failure. 203
Brake light failure. 203
Washer fluid level low.
Refill. 196
Coolant level low.
Refill. 188
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery. 41
Key not accepted.
Contact service. 48
Theft protection failure.
Contact service. 48
Gearbox too hot.
Make a safe stop. 146
Time for service.
1)
246
66 Instruments and controls
Units and language versions
The SID has four sets of units:
CHECK messages can be displayed in six
language options: English, Swedish,
German, French, Italian and Spanish.
Selecting units and language
1 Press CLEAR and SET simultaneously
for four seconds until a chime sounds.
2 Press or to select the requi-
red units.
3 Touch SET.
4 Press or to select the requi-
red language.
5 Touch SET.
Clock
Set the clock by means of the two buttons
under the digital clock on the left of the dis-
play.
When the ignition key is in the OFF position
or removed, the clock can be illuminated
(approx. 10 seconds) by pressing one of
the SID buttons (not the NIGHT PANEL
button).
METRIC IMP. 1 IMP. 2 US
km miles miles miles
km/h mph mph mph
liters UK gal UK gal US gal
°C °F °C °F
24-hour 12-hour 12-hour 12-hour
67Instruments and controls
Switches
The parking lights and daytime running
lights come on automatically when the igni-
tion switch is ON.
Note to owners in the U.S.: If you do not
want Daytime Running Lights, this feature
can be disconnected: switch off the engine
and remove fuse No. 35 (see page 213).
Note to owners in Canada: Daytime Run-
ning Lights must not be disconnected as
they are a Canadian Federal legal require-
ment.
The parking lights can be switched on
regardless of the position of the ignition
switch. Do not use parking lights when dri-
ving.
Note: The lighting switch must be in parking
light or headlight position (low beam posi-
tion only) to operate the fog lights (see
page 70).
The headlights come on automatically when
the ignition is ON and go off when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the LOCK position.
The parking lights, however, can be on
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-
tion.
High/low beam
To switch between high and low beam, pull
the control stalk fully towards you
(position 2). When the high beam is on, the
indicator on the main instrument panel will
be illuminated.
High beam flasher
The headlights come on to high beam when
the stalk is pulled to the first spring-loaded
position (position 1) and remain on until the
stalk is released.
Daytime running lights
Parking lights
Headlights
IB1594
1
2
1 High beam signal
2 High/low beam switching
IB350
Light switches
68 Instruments and controls
Courtesy Headlight Feature
A delay function allows the headlights to
remain on low beam for about 30 seconds
after the driver’s door has been closed.
To activate this function,
Switch off the ignition and remove the key
Open the driver’s door
Pull the high/low beam control stalk
towards the steering wheel like you are
flashing the high beam, see page 67. The
low beam headlights will now come on
immediately after the driver’s door has
been closed (within 30 seconds) and will
remain on for about 30 seconds.
The length of time for this function can be
adjusted by your authorized Saab dealer.
Rear fog light
Press the button to switch on the rear fog
light, which will only come on if the head-
lights are on.
The rear fog light will go off automatically
when the engine is switched off. When the
fog light is next needed, it will have to be
switched on manually again.
The rear fog light consists of one light so it
is not be mistaken for brake lights.
Make sure you are familiar with the app-
licable provincial/state law regarding the
use of rear fog lights.
WARNING
In poor visibility, avoid following the tail
lights of the vehicle in front of you. If the
vehicle stops suddenly, you may be
unable to avoid a crash and therefore risk
injury to yourself and others.
IB351
Rear fog light
69Instruments and controls
Instrument illumination
The brightness of the instrument illumina-
tion can be varied by means of the dimmer
switch adjacent to the headlight switch.
(See also Night panel on page 65).
In daylight or other equally bright light, the
instrument and switch illumination is auto-
matically extinguished.
Turn signal and lane change
indicators
To switch on the turn signals/lane change
indicators, move the stalk up or down.
The stalk has fixed positions for indicating a
right or left turn, and the indicators are can-
celled automatically (stalk returns to off
position).
The stalk also has an intermediate,
spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-
nalling when changing lanes or passing.
The respective indicator lights on the instru-
ment panel flash at the same frequency as
the direction indicators.
IB352
1
0
2
IB1595
Turn signal and lane change indicators
1 Right indicators
2 Left indicators
Instrument illumination
70 Instruments and controls
Front fog lights
(if equipped)
The front fog lights can be activated in both
low beam headlight and parking light posi-
tions. Fog lights should only be used in poor
visibility conditions.
Make sure you are familiar with the app-
licable provincial/state law regarding the
use of fog lights.
Hazard warning lights
When this button is pressed, all the turn
signal indicators and a symbol in the button
flash simultaneously. If the ignition is on,
both indicator lights on the instrument panel
will also flash.
If the hazard warning lights are left on for
some time, the flasher frequency will be
reduced to save the battery.
Hazard warning lights should only be used
if the car constitutes a hazard to other road
users.
Reversing lights
The reversing lights come on automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or selected
with the ignition switched on.
WARNING
Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
has to be left at the roadside on account
of a crash, engine trouble or a puncture.
If you carry a warning triangle or flares,
they should be set up along the side of the
road 300 ft. (100 m) behind your vehicle.
If the car is not clearly visible (e.g. over
the brow of a hill or bridge), place the tri-
angle/flare even further back.
IB355
IB356
Hazard warning lights
71Instruments and controls
Wipers and washers
There are three intermittent wiper positions.
Moving the control stalk to the spring-loa-
ded position between 0 and 2 will produce a
single sweep of the wipers.
The wipers are designed for optimal clea-
ning at all driving speeds. At higher speeds,
it may be possible to detect a slight ”sweep-
ing” sound. This may be due to the
increased air pressure on the blades at
higher speeds.
Headlight washers
(if equipped)
If low beam is on, the headlights are washed
every fifth time the windshield washers are
used or if 2 minutes have elapsed since the
windshield was last washed. The headlight
washers cannot be activated separately.
The headlight washers are of the high-pres-
sure type, which means that other parts of
the car may become wet if you activate the
washers while the car is stationary.
Rain sensing wipers
(if equipped)
The rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers. The sensor is located on
the windshield beside the rearview mirror.
The system varies between single sweeps
of the windshield and continuous wiping
depending on how much water or snow
there is on the windshield.
WARNING
Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is
ON when clearing snow and ice from the
windshield, to avoid personal injury.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the windshield
wipers, turn the rain sensor off before
washing the car in an automatic carwash.
IB359
0
4
1
2
3
0 OFF
1 Intermittent operation
2 Low speed
3 High speed
4 Washers
1
2
IB569
Control for setting wiper delay
1 Long delay
2 Short delay
72 Instruments and controls
Activate the system by lifting the control
stalk to position 1. The wipers make one
sweep for reference to see how much water
and snow is on the windshield. In future, the
sensor compares the amount of water and
snow on the windshield with this reference
value.
When the engine has been switched off,
the control stalk must be moved to posi-
tion 0 and back to position 1 to reactivate
the sensor.
Set the sensitivity using the control on the
wiper stalk (the same control as used for
wiper delay on cars not fitted with a rain sen-
sor). The sensor has three sensitivity set-
tings. It is most sensitive when in the upper-
most position (1). When a higher degree of
sensitivity is selected, the wipers make one
sweep of the windshield for reference.
The rain sensor has a daylight and a night
time mode. The sensor measures the
amount of available light and automatically
selects the appropriate mode. The sensor is
more sensitive at night. The function of the
rain sensor is impaired by dry snow.
Rear-window wiper
(9-5 SportWagon)
The rear-window wiper and washer are ope-
rated with the same stalk switch as used for
washing and wiping the windshield and
headlights.
This stalk has two additional switches,
ON/OFF and .
The ON position provides intermittent
wiping.
The position provides washing and
wiping. After a few sweeps the wiper stops
or reverts to intermittent wiping, if this has
been chosen. About 15 seconds after com-
pletion of the washing/wiping of the rear
window, the wiper makes a single sweep to
wipe away any remaining washer fluid.
A spring-loaded position between the OFF
and ON positions allows for a single sweep
of the rear-window wiper.
Intermittent wiping of the rear window
occurs when reverse gear is engaged if the
windshield wipers are in position 1, 2 or 3,
see page 71.
For how to adjust the rear window washer
jet on the 9-5 SportWagon, refer to
page 195.
2
1
IB1207
Rear-window wiper
1 Intermittent wiping
2 Washers
73Instruments and controls
Automatic climate
control (ACC)
The ACC system automatically works to
maintain the desired temperature inside the
car.
The system will achieve the desired tempe-
rature in the quickest possible way. Note
that selecting a higher or lower temperature
than that desired will not speed up the pro-
cess.
For the ACC system to be most effective, all
windows (and sunroof, if fitted) should be
closed.
Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an
inlet grille adjacent to the bottom edge of the
windshield. The air flows through a filter
upstream of the ACC system before deli-
very to the cabin. Cabin air is evacuated via
openings in the rear parcel shelf and then
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled and, finally, if required,
heated.
The filter is a combined particle and char-
coal filter. It is so efficient that levels of nox-
ious substances such as benzene and tolu-
ene are also reduced.
To reduce the likelihood of misting on the
insides of the windows, the glass should be
cleaned with a quality window cleaner. How
often this will need to be done depends on
how clean the air is – if there are smokers in
the car, cleaning will need to be done more
frequently.
AUTO
ECON OFF
AUTO
ECON OFF
IB367
91
5
4
2
3
6
87
ACC panel
1 Temperature setting: LH side
2 AUTO: All settings selected automatically
3 Manual setting of fan speed
4 Manual setting of air distribution
5 Rear-window heating: ON/OFF
6 Recirculation: ON/OFF
7 A/C compressor: ON/OFF
8 ACC system: ON/OFF
9 Temperature setting: RH side
74 Instruments and controls
The system has five sensors:
Outdoor temperature sensor
Interior temperature sensor
Sun sensor (mounted on top of the fascia)
Two blended-air temperature sensors
(mounted inside the front floor vents)
Note: If anything is placed over the sun sen-
sor, the ACC system will not function pro-
perly.
Panel vents
The panel vents swivel in all directions so
that air can be directed as desired. In winter,
for instance, the outer vents can be directed
onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
The flow of air through the panel vents can
be controlled individually for each vent by
means of the adjacent control. The climate
control system works best if the panel vents
are open. If you find the air cold or that it is
drafty, start by directing the air away from
the body. If the center vent is aimed up, it will
cool the interior temperature sensor and
you may need to adjust ACC up or down,
depending upon temperature desired.
IB362
Panel vent
IB368
1
2
1 Interior-temperature sensor
2 Sun sensor
75Instruments and controls
Temperature control
The cabin is divided into two temperature
zones:
The driver’s zone
The passenger zone (front and rear
seats)
The desired temperature can be set bet-
ween 58 and 82°F (15 and 27°C). In addi-
tion, there are also HI and LO settings (see
below). The HI and LO settings for the pas-
senger zone can only be selected if they are
also selected for the driver’s zone.
The displayed temperature is not the abso-
lute temperature but corresponds to the
comfort level normally experienced at that
temperature after allowance has been
made for the air flow, relative humidity, solar
radiation, etc., currently prevailing inside
the car.
The most usual temperature setting is
64–76°F (18–24°C), depending on perso-
nal preference and what clothing is worn.
To allow the system time to adjust, chan-
ges in the temperature setting can only be
made in steps of 2°F (1°C).
Once the desired climate has been achie-
ved, the rear center vents can be closed
to prevent warm air being distributed at
face height.
Settings when HI
selected:
Maximum heat
Air distribution to windshield and floor
Recirculation OFF (even if manually
selected before)
Fan: high speed
Settings shown on ACC display
Settings when LO
selected:
Maximum cooling (A/C compressor will
run even if ECON manually selected
before)
Air distribution through panel vents
Fan: maximum speed
Recirculation ON
Settings shown on ACC display
IB369
Air vent at rear side window
76 Instruments and controls
Functions
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
If a manual function is selected, it will be locked in but other functions
will be controlled automatically.
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and
recirculation will all be controlled automatically.
In falling temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched off at 32°F (0°C).
In rising temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched on at 41°F (+5°C).
If at the start the outside air temperature is 32–41°F
(0 – +5°C), the A/C compressor is switched off.
Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous
manual selections.
Pressing AUTO a second time will result in all the
automatically selected settings being displayed.
When the engine is started, the A/C system is in
AUTO mode, apart from any currently set program,
see page 79 and 80).
IB370
A/C compressor OFF.
No cooling of inlet air. Temperature, air distribution
and fan speed still under automatic control.
ACC system OFF.
Fan OFF.
A/C compressor OFF.
Warm air OFF.
Air-distribution selections locked in current settings.
Recirculation can be selected manually.
Pressing the AUTO button will put the system into
automatic mode.
Pressing the OFF button again will result in the sys-
tem reverting to any previous manual settings.
IB371IB372
77Instruments and controls
The rear-window and door-mirror heating is
controlled manually.
Switch off the heating as soon as the rear window
is clear, to avoid imposing a heavy load on the bat-
tery longer than necessary. Note, however, that the
heating will go off automatically after 2–10 minutes
(depending on the outdoor temperature) or sooner
if the voltage in the electrical system falls below
10 V
.
The ACC system can be programmed to switch on
the heating automatically when the outdoor temper-
ature is below 41°F (+5
°
C) and the temperature
inside the car is below 50°F (+10
°
C) (see ”Program-
ming I and II”, on pages 79 and 80).
Recirculation is selected automatically for effective
cooling, but it can also be switched on/off manually.
Although recirculation does not substantially affect
the air quality, it is useful to prevent unpleasant
smells or fumes being drawn into the car from
outside.
IB373
IB374
To increase the fan speed in steps.
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed
until the engine is running.
To decrease the fan speed in steps.
If the fan is set to 0, the A/C compressor will cut out
and ECON will appear on the display.
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed
until the engine is running.
IB375IB376
78 Instruments and controls
Air distribution
Press once:
Defrosting of all windows will take
place (air flow to rear side windows shut off) with:
The fan running at high speed.
Air being distributed to the defroster vents.
Normal temperature control will operate.
Recirculation will be OFF.
Heating of the rear window and door mirrors will
be switched ON.
The defroster function will continue to operate until
a new selection is made, although the heating for
the rear window and door mirrors will be switched
off automatically after 2–10 minutes, depending on
the temperature outside.
Press twice:
Air will be directed onto the windshield
with no increase in the fan speed. The heating for
the rear window will not be switched on.
To revert to the previous selection, press the AUTO
button.
ACC65
Defroster & floor vents
Floor vents and rear side windows
Floor & panel vents
ACC66
A
CC67
A
CC68
79Instruments and controls
Starting in cold weather
To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster set-
ting, maximum heat and low fan speed.
As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor
vents and the fan speed will be increased.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the
fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by
the system.
Starting in hot weather
The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents
at high fan speed and will switch on the A/C compressor (unless the
ECON switch has been pressed).
If the outdoor temperature is above 86°F (30°C), the system might
select recirculation after approximately 15 seconds if this is required
in order to reach the desired temperature.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan
speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.
Programming I
Manual selections can be programmed into the ACC system so that
these will take effect when the car is started. Note that the ignition
must be switched off for at least ten minutes after programming for
the selections to be saved in the system’s memory.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
2 Select the desired settings.
3 Press and , simultaneously
(the display will flash to confirm that the settings have been
recorded).
Example: If you want air distribution through the panel vents when
you start the car, press
and then save the setting by pressing
and .
Cancelling the programmed settings (I)
To cancel the programmed settings, press and
simultaneously (the display will flash to confirm that the settings
have been cancelled).
Panel (and center rear vent)
A
CC69
80 Instruments and controls
Programming II
It is also possible to customize the ACC system, e.g. to adapt to
driving and weather conditions.
Function Operation in AUTO mode
after Programming II
Standard operation
in AUTO mode
The A/C compressor will not
activate unless the outdoor
temperature is above 55°F
(+13°C).
–This function saves fuel by
delaying the activation of the
A/C compressor. However,
in wet weather it is advisable
to have the A/C compressor
running when outdoor tem-
peratures are below
57
°F
(+14
°
C), as the A/C system
reduces the likelihood of the
windows fogging up.
A/C compressor cuts
in when outdoor tem-
perature is above 41°F
(+5°C)
Recirculation will be swit-
ched on if the speed of the
car is less than 6 mph (10
km/h) and will be switched off
when the speed has risen
above 20 mph (30 km/h), but
not if the ECON mode has
been programmed according
to ”Programming II”.
To prevent misting, this func-
tion is disengaged at outdoor
temperatures lower than
45°F (+7°C) and engaged at
temperatures above 50°F
(+10°C).
–This function is useful to
prevent fumes being drawn
into the car in traffic jams.
Recirculation is swit-
ched on about
45 seconds after star-
ting if the outdoor tem-
perature is above 86°F
(+30
°
C) and the selec-
ted temperature for the
cabin is well below the
actual temperature in
both temperature
zones.
The heating will come on
about five seconds after the
engine has started if the out-
door temperature is below
41°F (+5°C).
–This function helps to pre-
vent ice or mist forming on
the rear window in cold,
damp weather. Fuel con-
sumption may increase
slightly.
Rear-window heating
can only be switched
on manually.
81Instruments and controls
To program a function or to cancel
a programmed function, press
and hold in the relevant button until the corresponding symbol has
flashed four times on the display and a chime has sounded.
Make sure the ignition is ON.
Example: To have the ACC system switch the heating for the rear
window and door mirrors ON/OFF automatically, press and hold in
until the symbol has flashed four times on the display and a
chime has sounded.
The display shows:
ACC:AUTO
RDEFR CTRL
Once a function has been recorded under ”Programming II”, it will
remain in the system until you cancel the program.
AUTO will still show on the display after a function has been saved
in ”Programming II”.
Calibration
If the battery has been disconnected or has died, the system will
need to be recalibrated.
To start the calibration procedure:
1 Start the engine.
2 Press and simultaneously.
Calibration takes about 30 seconds. During this time and for about
3 seconds after the operation has been completed, the number of
fault codes (if any) stored in the system will appear in the tempera-
ture display on the left. The fault codes themselves will be shown in
the temperature display on the right.
Useful tips
(Before driving the car to an authorized Saab dealer)
If AUTO is not shown on the display, see ”Cancelling the program-
med settings (I)” on page 79.
If you suspect that the ACC system is not functioning properly,
cancel (delete) all programmed settings and then recalibrate the
system.
See ”Cancelling the programmed settings (I) and (II)”, pages 79
and 80, and ”Calibration” above.
Note that AUTO will show on the display even if you have comple-
ted Programming II, but that this does not apply to Programming I.
If the battery has been disconnected or has died, the ACC system
will need to be recalibrated. See ”Calibration” above.
If the system starts in OFF mode, cancel the programme. Refer to
Cancelling the programmed settings (I) on page 79.
Function Text displayed on SID
during programming
Text displayed on SID
when cancelling
program
ACC:LO TEMP
A/C CTRL
ACC:NORMAL
A/C CTRL
ACC:RECIRC
SPEED CTRL
ACC:RECIRC
NORMAL CTRL
ACC:AUTO
RDEFR CTRL
ACC:MANUAL
RDEFR CTRL
82 Instruments and controls
Condensation
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-
densation is drained off through two outlets
underneath the floor of the car, in the vicinity
of the front doors.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from these outlets when
the car is parked. Greater amounts of con-
densation will result in warmer, more humid
ambient air.
Formation of ice and mist in
extremes of weather
It is only in the most extreme conditions that
icing and misting of window glass are likely
to be a problem, e.g. in torrential rain or
severe cold coupled with high relative humi-
dity, or when passengers are perspiring
heavily or wearing wet clothes.
The following measures are recommended
if such problems should occur:
1 Select AUTO and 70°
F
(21°C) for both
temperature zones.
2 Select Defroster.
If this is not enough...
3 Increase the fan speed.
If this is not enough...
4 Select a higher temperature.
The following measures are recommended
if the occupants feel that it is cold and drafty
in the car:
1 Make sure that all the air vents are fully
open, including the center rear vent.
If this is not enough...
2 Direct the air flow away from the body
(but not towards the interior temperature
sensor).
If this is not enough...
3 Raise the temperature setting a degree
or two. If this is not enough...
4 Lower the fan speed.
Fault diagnosis and maintenance, see
page 234.
83Saab 9-5 Audio System
Quick guide to the Saab
9-5 Audio System _____ 85
Sound controls ________ 87
Radio ________________ 88
Cassette player ________ 90
CD player_____________ 93
CD changer ___________ 95
Programmable functions 99
Steering-wheel controls_ 100
Security lock __________ 101
Technical data_________ 102
Fault codes ___________ 104
Saab 9-5 Audio System
84 Saab 9-5 Audio System
To get the best out of your Saab 9-5 Audio
System, we recommend that you read
through this entire section.
The Saab 9-5 Audio System is available in
two versions: Premium on the 9-5 Linear
and Prestige on the 9-5 Arc and 9-5 Aero
Both models have been specially matched
to the Saab 9-5 cabin.
The two systems are comprised of a radio,
CD player and cassette player.
A six-disc CD changer for installation in the
luggage compartment is available as a dea-
ler-installed accessory/option.
The Premium system has seven speakers:
three mounted in the fascia (the center
speaker further enhances the overall sound
image) and one in each door.
The Prestige system (Harman Kardon) has
nine speakers (9-5 Sport Wagon has eight
speakers): three mounted in the fascia (the
center speaker further enhances the sound
image), one in each door and two subwoo-
fers in the rear window shelf (9-5 Sport
Wagon: one subwoofer in the luggage
compartment). The subwoofers enhance
reproduction of the lowest bass notes.
The Audio System is connected to the Saab
Information Display (SID), which is at the
top of the main instrument panel. Messa-
ges, indicators and the like for the Audio
System are shown on this display.
Indicator
AS Radio is in Autostore mode
RDM Random playback of CD
tracks when CD player
selected
(DOLBY B)
DOLBY B noise reduction
on for cassette player
85Saab 9-5 Audio System
Quick guide to the
Saab 9-5 Audio System
Radio (see page 88)
ON
To switch the system ON, press the volume but-
ton. The last settings used will be activated.
If the Audio System is switched on when the igni-
tion key is not in the switch, the system will auto-
matically be switched off after one hour has
elapsed since a control button on the radio was
last pressed.
OFF
To switch the system OFF, press the volume but-
ton or remove the ignition key.
VOL
To adjust the volume, rotate the VOL control.
BAL
To adjust the balance between the left and right
channels, pull out and turn the VOL control.
BAS
Press to release the button, and adjust the bass
level. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
TRE
Press to release the button, and adjust the tre-
ble. Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
FAD
Press to release the button, and adjust the fade
between the front and rear sets of speakers.
Lock the setting by pushing the button in.
On all of the above selections, there is a detent
felt at the mid-point.
VOL
BALON
PULLPUSH
TRE
FADBAS
Preset station buttons
Press once:
play the preset station.
Press & hold briefly:
store a new station.
Auto tuning
Press once:
auto (seek) tuning.
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):
manual tuning.
Press once:
Autostore ON/OFF.
Press & hold briefly:
automatic tuning and sto-
ring of the 6 strongest stations.
Press once:
change waveband.
Press once:
activate radio.
213
546
AS
SEARCH
86 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Cassette player. See page 90
CD player. See page 93
CD changer (accessory/option). See page 95
Press once:
Selects cassette player when other
source active.
When tape playing:
Dolby B ON/OFF.
Switch to playback other side of tape.
Eject.
Press once:
Music search (next track).
Press & hold briefly:
Fast forward/rewind.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) (a chime will
sound):
Blank skip ON/OFF.
Press once:
switch to CD player when other
source active.
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):
Random playback.
Press once:
Track search.
Press & hold briefly:
Rapid play (passage
search) or Fast track search.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once (a chime
will sound):
Switches between Rapid play
(PLAY) and Fast track search (TRACK).
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold briefly (a
chime will sound):
Scan disc.
CD
RDM
Remove CD.
Press once:
Change to CD changer when CD
player is active.
Press twice:
Change to CD changer when radio
or cassette player is active.
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound):
Random playback of entire magazine.
Press once:
Track search on current disc.
Press & hold briefly:
Rapid play.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once:
Switch bet-
ween Rapid play (PLAY) and Fast track search
(TRACK).
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold briefly (a
chime will sound):
Scan/disc.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold
(2 chimes):
Scan/magazine.
Selects disc in magazine.
CD
RDM
213
546
87Saab 9-5 Audio System
Sound controls
ON/OFF
The Audio System will come on:
When the volume control is pressed.
When the ignition is switched ON, if the
Audio System was on when the ignition
key was last removed.
The Audio System will be switched off:
When the volume control is pressed.
When the ignition key is removed.
One hour after the ignition was switched
OFF, if the ignition key has not been remo-
ved.
When one hour has elapsed since a con-
trol button on the Audio System was last
pressed after the ignition key was remo-
ved.
VOL – Volume
BAL – Balance
Pull out and rotate the VOL control to adjust
the balance between the left and right spea-
kers. When the control is released, it reverts
to the volume function.
BAS – Bass
TRE – Treble
Rotate clockwise to increase the level and
counter-clockwise to reduce it.
The Bass and Treble controls must be pres-
sed first to release them.
FAD – Fader
The fader control adjusts the balance bet-
ween the front and rear sets of speakers.
The Fader controls must be pressed first to
release it.
IB1842
88 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Radio
Press the /BAND button to switch to the
radio when another source is active.
Preset station buttons (1)
Press once (release within a second) to
select a preset station, e.g.
The small figure on the far right of the dis-
play is the number of the preset button
selected.
Presetting a station
Press and hold in the desired button (for
more than a second) to store the currently
tuned station. During this time, the radio will
be mute. The sound will return as soon as
the station has been stored.
Tuning (2)
Automatic seek tuning:
Press briefly to search for higher fre-
quencies or for lower frequencies.
Manual tuning:
To switch to the manual-tuning function,
press or and release quickly
(a chime will sound and the M indicator will
appear on the display).
The function will revert to automatic seek
tuning two seconds after the last manual
frequency change has been made.
IB1843
89Saab 9-5 Audio System
Waveband selector (3)
Press the BAND button repeatedly to move
through the waveband selections: FM1,
FM2, and AM.
AS, Autostore (4)
The autostore mode provides an additional
preset function that can be used to search
for and to store stations when you are in an
area where you are unfamiliar with the sta-
tions and their frequencies.
Press the AS/SEARCH button to switch the
Autostore mode ON/OFF. When the Auto-
store mode is ON, the AS indicator will show
at the bottom of the display.
Press and hold in the AS/SEARCH button
for more than a second to initiate a search
for the six strongest stations.
Each time the system finds and stores a sta-
tion, the number on the far right of the dis-
play will change. If the system cannot find
six stations with good reception, the remain-
ing preset buttons will be empty. If one of
these empty buttons is pressed, U**** (FM)
or AM**** will appear on the display.
When the system leaves the AS mode, it
returns to the station that was selected
before the AS mode was activated.
The AS mode can also be used in the AM
band.
90 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Cassette player
Before playing a tape, make sure that the
label is secure and that the cassette is not
warped, otherwise the cassette can
become jammed in the deck. The cassette
player automatically senses whether the
tape is normal or metal (Type I or Type II).
TAPE (1)
Turn on the cassette player by pressing
or by inserting a cassette in the
deck, with the exposed tape to the right.
Playback will start with the side that is facing
up (indicated by A on the display). The dis-
play will now be as follows:
Playback direction (2)
To play the other side of the tape,
press .
The deck will automatically change the play-
back direction when the end of the tape is
reached, be it during playback, fast
forward/rewind or music search.
Dolby
®
noise reduction (3)
Press TAPE/DOLBY to switch on
Dolby NR B.
Dolby B should be on for playback of tapes
recorded with Dolby B, and off for those
recorded without Dolby B.
Eject button (4)
To stop playback of a tape, press the eject
button or select another source.
If you select another source without pres-
sing the eject button, the tape will remain in
the deck but the head and pinch rollers will
be clear of the tape. The same applies if the
Audio System is switched off while a tape is
being played. Tapes can still be ejected
when the system is turned off.
IB1844
3
5
2 4
1
91Saab 9-5 Audio System
Music search forward/reverse (5)
To search forward for a track, press
and release quickly (within half a second).
The following will now appear on the dis-
play:
To perform a backward search, press
instead.
A forward search will continue until a gap of
at least 4 seconds is found, or until you
press or (mid-segment).
Pressing and holding the button during a
search will initiate the fast-forward function.
Fast forward/rewind
Press and hold to start fast-
forward to the end of the tape. The following
will now appear on the display:
Press once to cancel fast-forward.
Press and hold (mid-segment)
briefly to switch to music search.
Fast rewind (<< WIND) is performed in the
same way as fast forward.
Auto music search
(Blank skip)
To switch the Blank-skip function ON/OFF,
press and hold (mid-segment).
When the Blank-skip function is active (dis-
play: BL SKIP ON), unrecorded gaps that
are longer than 15 seconds will automati-
cally be skipped.
When auto music search is in progress, the
following will show on the display:
If a track has been recorded at an unusually
low level and is therefore identified incor-
rectly as a gap between tracks, it could initi-
ate a spurious ”auto music search”.
To cancel such a search, press and hold
(mid-segment) during playback.
The following will now appear on the dis-
play:
92 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Type II (metal) tapes
The cassette has an automatic tape-type
selector.
Cleaning-due indicator
After 30 hours’ playing time, the following
message will appear on the display:
The message will be displayed for ten
seconds each time the cassette player is
selected.
A cleaning tape should be used to clean the
heads inside the cassette player to maintain
good reproduction and to prevent unneces-
sary wear.
To reset the playing-time meter:
1 Remove the current tape.
2 Load the cleaning tape and play it for the
required time.
3 Remove the cleaning tape and reload
the other one.
Tape care
Do not expose cassette tapes to direct sun-
light or to extremes of temperature as this
can damage the cassette and the tape.
Always keep cassettes in their boxes when
not in use.
If a cassette should become jammed in the
deck, contact an authorized Saab dealer.
93Saab 9-5 Audio System
CD player
To select the CD mode, load a CD into the
deck or, if one is already loaded, press the
CD/RDM button.
Insert the CD, label-side up, and allow the
mechanism to load it automatically. Play-
back of the first track will start and the follo-
wing message will appear on the display:
A tiny, amber-colored LED indicator to the
left of the disc tray is illuminated when a disc
is loaded.
When all the tracks have been played, the
CD player will restart playback from track 1.
To cancel playback, press the eject, RADIO
or TAPE button.
Track search (1)
Press or repeatedly to move
to preceding or following tracks. Pressing
once will restart playback from the
beginning of the current track. Thus, to play
the preceding track, press twice.
Rapid play (passage search)
When or is pressed and
held, rapid play will be initiated, with the time
and track showing on the display, e.g.:
If the button is depressed for more than
5 seconds, the rapid play will be even faster.
Rapid play stops when the button is rele-
ased.
NOTICE
Do not use writeable CDs in your Audio
System. In certain cases, this type of CD
is only suitable for home use and can the-
refore cause operational problems (over-
heating).
IB1845
2
1
3
94 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Fast track search
Press (mid-segment) once to
switch between the CD-PLAY and
CD-TRACK modes.
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes
change the function of and .
The selected mode will also be active the
next time the system is switched on.
Choose the mode that you find most
convenient:
Random playback (RDM) (2)
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to
select/deselect random playback of the cur-
rent disc. When this function is selected,
RDM will appear at the bottom of the
display.
Press once to move from the current
track to the next during random playback.
Press once to repeat the current
track during random playback.
Pressing and holding or will
start Rapid play.
SCAN
To start the SCAN function, which enables
you to hear a sample of each track on the
disc, press and hold (mid-seg-
ment). The display shows that SCAN is in
progress and which track is currently being
sampled. For instance, if you started SCAN
while playing the first track, the following
display will appear:
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the start of the track and lasts for
8 seconds.
When all the tracks on the disc have been
scanned, the system will revert to playback
of the track that was playing when SCAN
was selected.
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
Eject (3)
Press to remove the disc.
If you press the eject button to open the tray
but do not remove the disc, the CD player
will automatically close the tray again after
10 seconds, without restarting playback.
CD PLAY Pressing and holding
or briefly
starts Rapid play
CD TRACK Pressing and holding
or briefly
starts Fast track search
95Saab 9-5 Audio System
CD changer
(accessory)
Important! Always keep the sliding cover
closed to keep dust out of the CD changer,
so that it will continue to provide satisfactory
service for a long time.
To load the CD changer (which is installed
in the luggage compartment and can
accommodate six CDs) proceed as follows:
1 Slide the top back.
2 Lift out the CD magazine.
3 Press back the catch on the magazine.
4 Withdraw one CD tray at a time and
swap/load the CD (label side up).
5 Slide the tray back into the magazine.
Note the position of the magazine for loa-
ding (see picture).
Insert the entire magazine carefully inside
the CD changer and slide back the cover.
To select the CD changer
If the Audio System is in the RADIO or
TAPE mode, press the CD/RDM button
twice.
If the CD player is active, press the
CD/RDM button once.
If the CDs in the magazine have not been
changed, the system will start playback
from where it left off before.
If there is no magazine in the CD changer,
the following will appear on the display:
NOTICE
Do not use writeable CDs in your Audio
System. In certain cases, this type of CD
is only suitable for home use and can the-
refore cause operational problems (over-
heating).
IB383
4
3
Changing a CD
IB1341
2
1
CD changer in luggage compartment,
Saab 9-5 Sedan
IB1208
CD changer in luggage compartment,
Saab 9-5 SportWagon
96 Saab 9-5 Audio System
If the magazine in the CD changer is empty,
the following will appear on the display:
If the CD changer is activated right after a
magazine has been loaded, the following
will appear on the display:
The CD number will change as each CD is
played.
After a magazine has been loaded, play-
back will start with the first track on the first
CD when the CD changer is selected, and
the following will appear on the display:
Selecting CDs (1)
When the CD changer is operating, the
radio preset buttons work for the six CDs in
the magazine. Press the button for the
corresponding CD.
If the selected CD is already being played,
playback will restart from the first track.
If the selected CD-tray is empty, the follo-
wing will appear on the display:
After two seconds, the status of the trays in
the magazine (i.e. loaded or empty) will be
shown on the display, e.g.:
IB1846
3
1
2
97Saab 9-5 Audio System
If for some reason the CD selected by the
preset button cannot be played, playback of
the current CD will continue.
Track search (2)
Press or repeatedly to move
to preceding or following tracks. Pressing
once will restart playback from the
beginning of the current track. Thus, to play
the preceding track, press twice.
Rapid play
When or is pressed and
held, rapid play will be initiated, with the time
and track showing on the display, e.g.:
If the button is depressed for more than
5 seconds, the rapid play will be even faster.
Rapid play stops when the button is rele-
ased.
Fast track search
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once to switch
between the CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK
modes.
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes
change the function of and .
The selected mode will also be active the
next time the system is switched on.
Choose the mode that you find most
convenient:
CD PLAY Pressing and holding
or briefly
starts Rapid play
CD TRACK Pressing and holding
or briefly
starts Fast track search
IB1846
3
1
2
98 Saab 9-5 Audio System
SCAN
Scanning the current CD:
To start the SCAN function, which enables
you to hear a sample of each track on the
disc, press and hold (mid-seg-
ment). The display shows that SCAN is in
progress and which track is currently being
sampled. For instance, if you started SCAN
while playing track one, the following dis-
play will appear:
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the start of the track and lasts for 8
seconds.
When all the tracks on the disc have been
scanned, the system will revert to playback
of the track that was playing when SCAN
was selected.
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
Scanning the entire magazine:
Press and hold (mid-segment -
two chimes) to start a scan of the entire
magazine. A message similar to the follo-
wing will appear on the display:
The sample playback starts 30 seconds
after the beginning of the first track on each
CD and lasts for 8 seconds.
After the first track of each CD has been
sampled, the CD changer will revert to play-
back of the track that was playing when
SCAN was selected.
Press any segment of the SEEK button
during scanning to play the current track
from the beginning and simultaneously
cancel the SCAN function.
Random playback (RDM) (3)
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to
select/deselect random playback of the
CDs in the magazine. When this function is
selected, RDM will appear at the bottom of
the display.
Press once to move from the current
track to the next during random playback.
Press once to repeat the current
track during random playback.
Pressing and holding or will
start Rapid play.
To stop
playback from the CD changer,
simply select once to move from the current
track to the next during random playback
(RADIO/TAPE/ CD). The CD changer will
now enter stand-by mode.
99Saab 9-5 Audio System
Programmable
functions
Volume-preset mode
To select the volume-preset mode, press
and hold the BAND button at the same time
as you switch the Audio System on.
Use the button to select the desi-
red function.
The following volume settings can be
preselected:
•STARTVOL
maximum
volume level
when the Audio System is switched on
TEL VOL – preset volume level when an
in-car phone is activated
SP D VOL – speed-dependent volume.
The Audio System will automatically
adjust the volume level to compensate for
background noise, such as road noise,
which increases with vehicle speed.
LOUDNESS ON/OFF – boosting of the
highest and lowest frequency ranges to
enhance the sound image when the
volume is set to a low level.
Adjusting the volume
The default setting for START VOL is
volume setting 9, and that for TEL VOL is
volume setting 14 (the highest volume set-
ting is 30).
Maximum
START VOL
•TELVOL
To change the volume setting:
Press and hold the BAND button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
After START VOL appears, release the
BAND button.
Adjust the starting volume using the
volume knob.
Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO or BAND, to save the
new volume setting.
Speed-dependent volume
(SP D VOL) ON/OFF
To change the default setting:
The default setting for this function is ON.
Press and hold the BAND button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
After START VOL appears, release the
BAND button.
Select SP D VOL using
Select ON or OFF using the VOL control.
Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO or BAND, to save the
new default setting.
WARNING
These functions should only be carried
out when the car is stationary.
100 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Loudness ON/OFF
To change the default setting:
The default setting for this function is ON.
Press and hold the BAND button at the
same time as you switch on the Audio
System.
After START VOL appears, release the
BAND button.
Select LOUDNESS using
Select ON or OFF using the VOL control.
Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new
default setting.
Steering-wheel controls
To facilitate use of the Audio System and to
promote safer driving, most of the functions
can be operated using the integral remote
controls on the steering wheel.
Control functions:
NXT:
RADIO mode: preselect buttons
1
2
...
6
1
...
TAPE mode: Play other side of tape.
CD mode: Inoperative.
CD-changer mode: Select CD in magazine
1
2
...
6
1
...
<< SEEK >>:
RADIO mode: Auto/manual tuning.
TAPE mode:
Music search/Fast forward or rewind.
CD/CD-changer mode:
Track search/Rapid play.
SRC (source)
Press repeatedly to switch between
RADIO
TAPE
CD
(CD changer)
RADIO
...
VOL +/–:
Volume adjust.
IB385
Audio System controls on steering wheel
101Saab 9-5 Audio System
Security lock
The Audio System is equipped with an elec-
tronic security lock. The special code is
unique to the car in which the Audio System
is fitted.
Each time the Audio System is switched on,
a check is made to ensure that the codes
match.
If not, the following will appear on the dis-
play:
If a CD changer has been installed, it will
also have been security coded.
If the security code for the CD changer does
not match when the changer is selected, the
following will appear on the display:
If a CD changer is to be retrofitted or if you
wish to move the main Audio System
module and/or CD changer to another car
(Saab 9-5), you
must
consult an authorized
Saab dealer so that the modules can be
given the correct security codes.
102 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Technical data
These specifications comply with the new IHF Standard
Since the policy at Saab is one of continual improvement, we retain the right to alter
specifications and design without prior notice.
Dolby noise reduction is produced under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation
”Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licen-
sing Corporation
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance
could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.
Tone controls
Bass ____________________ ±10 dB at 100 Hz
Treble ____________________ ±10 dB at 10,000 Hz
Power output
Premium _________________ 150 W
110 W at 1 % THD (total har-
monic distortion) and 13.5 V
Prestige __________________ 200 W
150 W at 1 % THD (total har-
monic distortion) and 13.5 V
Radio module
Radio system _______________ PLL dual-synthesizer tuner
Number of presets:
FM ______________________ 3 x 6
AM ______________________ 2 x 6
Frequency range:
FM ______________________ 87.9–107.9 MHz
AM ______________________ 530–1710 kHz
Tuning steps:
Automatic seek tuning: ______ FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
Manual tuning: _____________ FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
Frequency range (FM) ________ 40–15000 Hz
±1 dB
Distortion (FM) ______________ < 0.5 %
Cassette player
Fast forward/rewind __________ < 120 seconds (C-60)
Frequency range _____________ 40–16000 Hz
±2 dB
Wow and flutter ______________ 0.2 % WRMS
Signal-to-noise ratio __________ 45 dB
Dolby B
NR effect ____________ 8/16 dB
CD player and CD changer
1-bit system and 8 x oversampling
Frequency range _____________ 20–20000 Hz
±0.5 dB
Distortion __________________ < 0.008 %
Dynamics __________________ > 80 dB (1 kHz)
CD-changer capacity__________ 6 discs
103Saab 9-5 Audio System
Antennas
The Audio System has three antennas
incorporated in the rear window; two for FM
diversity and one for AM.
The car has a factory-fitted roof antenna for
a mobile phone/OnStar. Roof loads may
negatively affect telecommunication.
Multipath propagation
Multipath propagation occurs when radio
waves from an FM transmitter are reflected
by, e.g. large buildings, causing them to
arrive slightly later than the direct waves.
This can create interference to radio recep-
tion. To avoid this problem as much as pos-
sible the system is equipped with two FM
antennas, so called FM diversity.
NOTICE
Refrain from placing hard or sharp
objects on the rear parcel shelf, to avoid
damaging the antenna leads.
Do not use sun protective film which con-
tains metal particles on the rear window,
this can be the cause of radio interfe-
rence.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head injuries in the
event of a crash, the headliner and pillar
trims incorporate energy absorbing mate-
rial. These areas must not be modified in
any way. Work on these areas must only
be carried out by an authorized Saab dea-
ler.
IB386
IB389
IB1743
Accessories and other equipment must
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
these are where the airbags inflate in the
event of a crash
104 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Adjusting the frequency steps
North America/Europe
If the car is taken from North America to
Europe, the radio’s frequency steps can be
adjusted.
Press and hold (mid-segment)
and switch the radio on at the same time.
The preset stations will be cancelled and
replaced by default frequencies.
Fault codes
The Audio System has a built-in diagnostics
function. If a fault is detected, a fault code is
generated to help dealer technicians to
diagnose the fault. Below are the codes for
some faults that you might be able to rectify
yourself.
OnStar System
Your vehicle may be equipped with OnStar,
a vehicle telematics communications sys-
tem. Please consult the separate OnStar
Owner’s Manual for system details.
NOTICE
Great care should be exercised in trying
to rectify a fault. If you are at all unsure,
contact an authorized Saab dealer.
Fault code Possible cause
CD/CDC
ERROR
12/17/19
CD is dirty, loaded
wrong side up or defec-
tive.
TAPE ERR 01 Tape broken or
mechanical fault in
deck.
TAPE ERR
02/03
Tape snarled up or
mechanical fault in
deck.
TAPE ERR 11 Cassette jammed: can-
not be loaded/ejected.
WARNING
The CD player/CD changer is classified
as Class 1 laser equipment
Service and repair work must only be
carried out by authorized technicians.
If the casing is damaged, hazardous
laser radiation can occur.
NOTICE
All work on the Audio System must be
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
105Interior equipment and trunk
Steering wheel
adjustment___________ 106
Rearview mirrors_______ 107
Electric windows_______ 113
Sunroof ______________ 114
Interior lighting ________ 116
Sun visors ____________ 117
Ashtrays______________ 117
Glove compartment ____ 118
Cup holders___________ 120
Trunk ________________ 121
IB394
Interior equipment and trunk
106 Interior equipment and trunk
Steering wheel
adjustment
Fore-and-aft and tilt adjustment of the stee-
ring wheel is possible.
Pull down the lever fully until you hear a
click. Move the steering wheel to the desired
position and then raise the lever. The lever
should lock with a click.
Make sure that the lever is fully locked
before driving off.
Horn
The horn is sounded by pressing the central
part of the steering wheel. Press closest to
the steering wheel rim.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel unless
the car is stationary.
IB408
To adjust the steering wheel
IB1563
107Interior equipment and trunk
Rearview mirrors
Door mirrors
The door mirrors may have an auto dimming
function (option) and the passenger side
door mirror is of the wide-angle ‘‘aspheric”
type.
The door mirrors are designed to fold back
if knocked. They can also be fully retracted
for parking in tight spaces, such as on the
car deck of a ferry. Remember to fold them
out again before driving off.
The adjusting switch is on the driver’s door.
If the car is equipped with a programmable
driver’s seat, the settings of the door mirrors
can also be stored in the preset buttons for
the seat (see page 14).
Cars equipped with a programmable dri-
ver’s seat also have the ability to angle the
passenger’s mirror down when reversing,
e.g. for a better view of the curb.
1 Select reverse.
2 Press the tiny button adjacent to the
doormirror switch to tilt the mirror. The
mirror will be reset automatically when
reverse gear is deselected.
The mirror glass can also be adjusted
manually by gently pressing the glass in the
desired direction.
The mirrors are heated, and the heating
comes on and goes off with the rear-window
heater.
NOTICE
The door mirrors should be fully retracted
before the car enters an automatic car
wash.
Adjusting the door mirrors
1 Select mirror
2 Use touch pad to adjust mirror
Door mirror folded in
IB568
Button for angling passenger’s mirror
down when reversing
108 Interior equipment and trunk
Rearview mirror
The rearview mirror has day/night positions
that can be selected by means of a knob
beneath the mirror. Adjust the mirror in day
position.
Interior rearview auto-dimming
mirror with garage door opener,
and digital compass
(if equipped)
Retain your original garage door transmitter
for future programming procedures (i.e.,
new vehicle purchase). It is also suggested
that upon the sale of the vehicle, the pro-
grammed garage opener buttons be erased
for security purposes.
WARNING
Make sure that people and objects are out
of the way of a moving door or gate to pre-
vent potential harm or damage.
When programming the garage opener,
you may be operating a garage door or
gate operator. Therefore it is advised to
park outside of the garage.
Do not use the garage opener with any
garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by
federal safety standards. (This includes
any garage door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982.). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an
object, signalling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.
Rearview mirror
1 Day position
2 Night position
Buttons for garage opener and compass
1-3 Garage opener
4 LED
5 Compass/auto dimming ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing
109Interior equipment and trunk
Preparations for first-time programming
Before programming the garage opener for
the first time, you must delete any factory
codes.
Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not
hold for longer that 30 seconds. The garage
opener is now in the train (or learning) mode
and can be programmed at any time begin-
ning with "Programming" - step 2.
Programming
The garage opener can record and store the
frequencies of three different remote con-
trols.
The battery in the remote control should be
fairly new for programming to work well.
Do not repeat "Programming" - step two
to train additional devices to a second or
third button. Begin with "Programming" -
step three.
1 Turn the ignition ON.
2 Press and hold the two outer buttons
(buttons one and three) - releasing only
when the indicator light begins to flash
(after 20 seconds).
Do not
hold the but-
tons for longer than 30 seconds and
do
not repeat step two
to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmit-
ter to the remaining two buttons.
3 Position the end of your hand-held trans-
mitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away from
the button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view. The
transmitter should face the mirror from
below or left side of the mirror.
4 Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen and hand-held transmitter but-
tons.
Do not release the buttons until
step 5 has been completed.
Note:
Some gate operators and garage
door openers may require you to replace
this Programming Step 4 with procedures
noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-
gramming" section.
5 After the indicator light changes from a
slow to a rapidly blinking light, release
both the mirror and hand-held transmit-
ter buttons.
6 Press and hold the just-trained button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light
stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the button is pressed and released.
Note:
To program the remaining two but-
tons, begin with "Programming" -
step
three. Do not repeat step two
.
If the indicator light blinks
rapidly for two
seconds and then turns to a constant
light continue with "Programming"
steps 7-9
to complete the programming of
a rolling code equipped device (most com-
monly a garage door opener).
7 At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the "learn" or "smart" button. This can
usually
be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
8 Firmly press and release the "learn" or
"smart" button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note:
There are 30 seconds in which to ini-
tiate step nine.
9 Return to the vehicle and firmly
press,
hold for two seconds and release
the
programmed button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release"
sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to com-
plete the programming process.
The garage opener should now activate
your rolling code equipped device.
Note:
To program the remaining two but-
tons, begin with "Programming" -
step
three
. Do not repeat step two.
110 Interior equipment and trunk
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission -
which may not be long enough for the
garage opener to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
"time-out" in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
culties programming a gate operator by
using the "Programming" procedures
(regardless of where you live),
replace
"Programming " step 4
with the following:
Note:
If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the "cycling" process to pre-
vent possible overheating.
10 Continue to press and hold the button
while you
press and release - every
two seconds
("cycle") your hand-held
transmitter until the frequency signal
has successfully been accepted by the
garage opener. (The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly.)
Proceed with "Programming" step five to
complete.
Reprogramming a single button
To program a device to the garage opener
using a button previously trained, follow
these steps:
1 Press and hold the desired button.
DO
NOT
release the button.
2 The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the but-
ton, proceed with "Programming" - step
3.
Erasing the three buttons
To erase programming from the three but-
tons (individual buttons cannot be erased
but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined
below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light
begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do
not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The
garage opener is now in the train (or lear-
ning) mode
and can be programmed at
any time beginning with "Programming" -
step 3.
NOTICE
Switch off the power supply to the garage
door or gate (or park the car beyond the
range of the remote control) while pro-
gramming using the "cycling" method to
prevent damaging the electrical motor.
111Interior equipment and trunk
Opening a garage door
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed button. Activation will now
occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter
of the device may also be used at any time.
Rearview auto-dimming mirrors
(accessory)
The autodimming is activated and deacti-
vated with a short push on button 2.
If the mirror is equipped with Garage Door
Opener (option) the letter 1 is displayed on
compass bearing display briefly when auto
dimming is activated. When deactivating
the letter 0 is displayed.
The interior rearview mirror has two sen-
sors, one forward-facing and one
rear-facing. They also activate and deacti-
vate the auto dimming feature on door mir-
rors.
The system is activated when the for-
ward-facing sensor detects that it is dark
outside and the rear-facing sensor detects.
For example, if the car following has not
dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirrors
are then darkened to prevent the strong light
source from dazzling the driver. This dar-
kening is stepless.
The mirrors return to their normal states
when the strong light source diminishes.
The auto dimming function can be turned
OFF with the switch on the lower edge of the
rear-view mirror.
NOTE
Towing a trailer can cause the system to
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
sense light from the trailer.
NOTICE
Switch off the power supply to the garage
door or gate (or park the car beyond the
range of the remote control) while pro-
gramming using the "cycling" method to
prevent damaging the electrical motor.
1 Forward-facing sensor
2 ON/OFF switch, auto dimming function
3 Rear-facing sensor
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
must accept any interference received, including interfe-
rence that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interfe-
rence that may cause undesired operation of this device.
112 Interior equipment and trunk
Compass
The compass is integrated in the rearview
mirror. The compass bearing is displayed in
the top right-hand corner of the mirror and is
updated every other second. The compass
displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,
E, etc.
Switch the compass display on and off by
pressing button 5 for 3 seconds.
Changing zones
The earth’s magnetic fields vary depending
on one’s position on the globe. If you drive
your car from one magnetic zone to another
the compass setting will need to be changed
to ensure a correct bearing.
1 Study the illustrations to determine the
correct zone.
2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is
shown in the display on the mirror
(6 seconds). The zone number setting
now is also shown.
3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the
zone number. There are 15 zones from
which to choose. Once the correct zone
is selected, release the button and wait
4 seconds. The compass will now dis-
play the bearing.
Calibration
Calibration is performed automatically
during travel. If an accessory, such as a
mobile phone, is fitted and it can be assu-
med that the compass is affected, the com-
pass may need to be calibrated manually.
1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and
the compass bearing are displayed
(approx. 9 seconds).
2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or
drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer
displayed.
Compass zones in USCompass zones in Canada
113Interior equipment and trunk
Electric windows
The electric motors of the front windows are
equipped with overload protection (integra-
ted thermal protection). This protection ope-
rates when the windows are wound down
automatically (switch pressed fully down).
To open:
Front windows: press the front of the switch
Rear windows: Press the back of the switch.
The switches for the front windows have a
third position for automatic opening of the
window. Press the switch fully down to lower
the window completely.
To cancel automatic lowering of the win-
dow, lift the switch briefly.
To close:
Front windows: Lift the front of the switch.
Rear windows: Lift the back of the switch.
The actuating motor will be switched off
automatically when the window is fully
closed or when the switch is released.
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when the
side windows are being wound up.
Always
remove the ignition key when
you leave the car. This prevents per-
sonal injury caused by the electric win-
dows, for example, due to children
playing.
The person operating the electric win-
dows is responsible for ensuring that
no one, especially children, has their
head, hands or fingers in the window
openings, before raising the windows.
Raising the windows could otherwise
cause serious or fatal injuries.
IB3231
1 Window switches
2 Switch for rendering rear door window switches inoperative
114 Interior equipment and trunk
Child safety: rear windows
(ON/OFF)
The window switches on the rear doors can
be rendered inoperative by the ON/OFF
switch in the panel on the center console.
When the switch is ON, the rear side win-
dows can be operated by the switch on each
rear door. The switch’s back lighting will be
activated.
When the switch is OFF, the rear side win-
dows can only be operated from the panel
on the center console. When off, the
switch’s back lighting will also be switched
off.
Sunroof
(if equipped)
The sunroof is operated by the switch on the
overhead panel above the rearview mirror.
The sunroof can be opened partially or fully.
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clo-
sing the sunroof.
Always
remove the ignition key when
you leave the car. This prevents per-
sonal injury caused by the electric
sunroof, for example, due to children
playing.
The person operating the electric sun-
roof is responsible for ensuring that no
one, especially children, has their
head, hands or fingers in the opening,
before closing the sunroof. Operating
the sunroof could otherwise cause
serious or fatal injuries.
IB445
Switch for rear side window
115Interior equipment and trunk
To open:
Slide the control towards the rear to open
the sunroof to the comfort position.
To open it fully, slide the control back a
second time. Press the control to stop it
earlier.
To close:
Slide the control forwards until the sunroof
is closed.
Ventilation position
Press the middle of the control (when sun-
roof closed).
To close: slide the control forwards.
To fully open the sunroof from the ventila-
tion position, slide the control back.
The sunroof incorporates an interior,
manual, sliding sun blind.
After the car has been waxed, the sunroof
may squeak or squeal on opening to the
ventilation position. If this should occur, fully
open the sunroof and, using washer fluid,
wash the seal along the front edge, together
with the paintwork that is in contact with the
seal when the roof is closed.
Emergency operation of sunroof
In an emergency (e.g. if there is an electrical
failure) the sunroof can be operated by a
screwdriver. Remove the cover at the front
of the sunroof opening, insert a screwdriver
in the groove, and rotate.
Rotate counterclockwise to close sunroof.
IB430
1
3
2
Sunroof control
1 To open
2 To close
3 Ventilation position
IB431
Manual operation of sunroof
116 Interior equipment and trunk
Interior lighting
The interior lighting consists of one dome
light in the front and one in the back, a
map-reading light in the front, two reading
lights in the back, floor courtesy lights in the
front (in some model variants) and door
courtesy lights on all doors.
The courtesy lights come on automatically
when the respective door is opened. Each
reading light has its own switch adjacent to
the lamp.
The switch for the dome lights is on the front
overhead panel. When the switch is in the
mid-position (door-activated), the interior
lighting will come on:
When the car is unlocked from the out-
side.
When any door is opened.
When the ignition key is withdrawn from
the ignition switch.
When the switch on the overhead panel is in
the mid-position, the lighting is switched off
automatically 30 seconds after the last door
has been closed or when the ignition is swit-
ched ON.
There is also a light in the sun visors. The
light comes on when the cover over the
vanity mirror is opened.
When the ignition is OFF, if a door has been
left open for 20 minutes, the interior lighting
will be switched off automatically to save the
battery.
Luggage-compartment lighting
The luggage-compartment lighting comes
on automatically when the trunk is opened
and goes out when the trunk is closed.
The lighting will also be switched off auto-
matically after 20 minutes if the trunk has
been left open.
1
2
3
IB357
1
2
1
IB358
1 Reading lights
2 Dome light
1 Interior lighting on continuously
2 Lighting comes on when a door is opened
3 Lighting always off
117Interior equipment and trunk
Sun visors
The car is equipped with double sun visors.
One section of the visor can be indepen-
dently pivoted to the side window.
A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the
sun visors. The vanity mirrors are illumina-
ted when the cover is raised.
Ashtrays
(accessory)
The car can be equipped with three asht-
rays: one in the instrument panel fascia, and
one in each rear door. A cigarette lighter is
fitted adjacent to the front ashtray, and there
is also one in the back of the center console.
Front ashtray
1 To open the ashtray, push gently on the
center/upper part of the front and rele-
ase to allow it to spring out.
2 Close the ashtray in the same way.
To remove the ashtray, open it and after that
pull left side out at an angle.
To refit, line up the slots on either side and
slide it closed.
Rear ashtrays
Open the lid to use ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, fully open the lid and
lift the ashtray straight out.
To refit the ashtray, make sure it engages
the two square recesses in the door trim.
IB1180
Sun visor
IB1285
1
2
Front ashtray
1 Press soft to open/close
2 Pull out one side at an angle
IB434
Rear ashtray
118 Interior equipment and trunk
Cigarette lighters
(accessory/certain markets only)
The car is provided with cigarette lighters
next to the front ashtray and in the rear end
of the center console.
The cigarette lighter socket can also be
used as power point, e.g. for a mobile
phone. The ignition should be in the ON
position.
The cigarette lighter sockets can also be
used for accessories (e.g. to charge a
mobile phone) when the ignition is ON.
Glove compartment
The glove compartment can be cooled by
the air conditioning (ACC) system. Cold air
can be directed to the glove compartment
for keeping drinks cool, etc.
Slide the cover to open/close the air inlet.
Additional storage facilities are provided
(see next page).
WARNING
The maximum combined load for the two
cigarette lighter sockets is 240 W (20 A).
WARNING
The glove compartment must be closed
while travelling. An open glove compart-
ment door could cause leg injuries in the
event of a crash.
IB1286
Sliding cover in glove compartment to
admit cold air
119Interior equipment and trunk
IB436
IB437
IB439
IB441
IB438
On the back of the front seats
Center armrest for rear seat
On leading edge of front seats
Console between front seats
In the doors
120 Interior equipment and trunk
Cup holders
Cup holders are provided in the instrument
panel fascia, in the center console compart-
ment between the front seats, and in the
rear-seat armrest (certain variants only).
To access the cup holder in the instrument
panel, press the symbol and release.
To access the cup holder in the rear seat
armrest, lower the armrest and press the
front edge of the holder. Close in the same
way.
The number of cup holders provided may
vary between models.
WARNING
The cup holder should not be used to
hold cups made of china, glass or hard
plastic as these can cause injury in the
event of a crash.
Use only for paper cups or aluminium
cans.
Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
drinks.
Avoid putting oversized cups in the
cup holder.
NOTICE
Take care not to spill any liquid on the
audio system when using the cup
holders. Soft drinks in particular can
cause malfunction.
IB1153
1
2
Cup holder in center console (if equipped)
IB443
Cup holder in rear armrest (if equipped)
Press the edge to open/close.
IB444
Cup holder in fascia
1 Press symbol to open
2 Lift bottom to close
121Interior equipment and trunk
Trunk
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan
The rear seat is split and the two sections can be folded indepen-
dently. Folding down of the rear seat is easier if the front seats are
not all the way back, and the rear head restraints are folded down.
1 Raise the rear seat cushions by pulling the loop located between
the cushion and the backrest.
2 Tip the seat cushion forward.
3 Press the button adjacent to the respective backrest to release it.
4 Fold down the backrest.
WARNING
Rear-seat passengers should always ensure that the head
restraint is raised and in proper position for the seats to be
occupied.
Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
Never place heavy objects on the rear window shelf. There is
always a danger of loose objects flying about and causing
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a
crash.
Before folding up the backrest, hang the outer safety belts
onto the hook on the respective courtesy handle to prevent
them from becoming trapped.
Check that the back rest release button (3) is flush with the
surround before entering the rear seat.
IB459
1 2
4
3
IB461
Outer safety belt hooked onto courtesy handle
122 Interior equipment and trunk
WARNING
Place heavy items closest to the backrest and stow smaller
and lighter items on top.
Never
overload the cargo net (accessory). If the elastic
breaks this may cause personal injury. Do not use a cargo net
that shows signs of wear.
Secure heavy and bulky items using the tie down points
provided in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage
flying around if the car should brake suddenly or be involved
in a crash (see page 123).
Secure small items if the backrest is folded down or the
load-through hatch is open. Small items can also be thrown
around inside the car and cause personal injury.
Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 252).
Make sure that the seat cushions and backrests are properly
secured when folding them back to their normal position.
Check that the button (item 3 on page 121) is flush with the
surround before entering the back seat.
The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot during
driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading the car so
that children, for example, do not burn themselves.
IB462
123Interior equipment and trunk
Trunk pass-through hatch
A trunk pass-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest
to enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Items should not weigh more than 33 lbs. (15 kg) nor be more than
2 yards (2 metres) in length. See the label on the hatch.
1 Fold down the armrest.
2 Raise the hatch by lifting the handle.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the handbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off
suddenly if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into
gear.
Tie Downs
The tie downs for securing the load are fitted inside the trunk. Place
the load as far in as possible.
WARNING
Anchor the load securely (e.g. using middle safety belt) to
avoid danger of injury resulting from displacement of load on
hard braking.
Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 252).
IB463
IB464
124 Interior equipment and trunk
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 SportWagon
Both the narrow and wide sections of the rear seat can be folded
separately. Folding is facilitated if the front seats are not located too
far back. The wide section cannot be folded separately if a cargo net
(accessory) is mounted on the rear of the backrest.
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For
height adjustment refer to page 15.
2 Put the safety belts for the outer seat places in their respective
belt clips, which are located near the backrest (see illustration).
3 Raise the rear seat cushions by pulling the loop located between
the cushion and the backrest.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising
the opening handle on the right-hand side.
5 Fold the wide section of the backrest forward in the
corresponding manner.
6 Adjust the front seats for optimal driving/passenger comfort.
Alternative location of the parcel shelf if this is removed:
Folded up on the floor at the rear of the luggage compartment.
On edge behind the backrests of the front seats.
NOTICE
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in
their respective belt clips near the backrest to prevent them from
being pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position.
IB1211
IB3127
Safety belt loca-
ted in its belt clip
125Interior equipment and trunk
Folding the narrow section of the backrest
The folding is facilitated if the front seat is not too far back.
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For
height adjustment refer to page 15.
2 Put the safety belt in the belt clip near the backrest.
3 Raise the rear seat cushion by pulling the loop located at the rear
of the cushion.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising
the opening handle.
5 Adjust the front seat for optimal passenger comfort.
WARNING
Do not travel in the back seat without ensuring that the head
restraint is set at a suitable height for the seats to be occupied.
Never allow anyone to sit on a folded backrest.
Always be aware of the risk of pinching when handling moving
parts of the seating.
Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always
a danger of loose objects flying about and causing injury if the
car should brake suddenly or be involved in a crash.
Make sure that the backrests are locked when they are folded
back upright. Check that the two red warning-indication flags
are fully down. This indicates that the backrests are locked.
Check that the safety belt lock is not trapped under the seat
cushions when these are raised back up.
If the car is equipped with a pull-out cargo net (accessory) on
the rear of the backrest, take extra care when folding the rear
seat so that no one is injured by the net’s storage cassette on
the right-hand side.
NOTICE
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in
their respective belt clips near the back rest to prevent them being
pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position, see
illustration page 124.
IB3128
126 Interior equipment and trunk
Load anchoring
Driving with the trunk lid/tailgate open, see
page 171.
WARNING
Put heavy loads as low down and as
far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment, i.e. against the back of
the rear seat.
Never
overload the cargo net (acces-
sory). If the elastic breaks this may
cause personal injury. Do not use a
cargo net that shows signs of wear.
Never stack cargo so high that any part
of the cargo lies above the edge of the
backrest, if a cargo guard (accessory)
is not being used.
Always tie down the cargo so that it
cannot be thrown forward during
heavy braking or in the event of a
crash.
Unsecured and heavy cargo can
increase the risk of injury during hard
braking, sudden avoidance maneu-
vers and in the event of a crash.
For the best load anchoring, use the
special cargo bolts and load straps
(accessory).
Load the cargo bolts evenly. Never
attach more than one strap to each tie
down eye.
Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the load straps.
Never use the elastic floor net (acces-
sory) and elastic side net (accessory)
when the rear seat is folded down.
These nets are only intended to keep
light objects tidy, not for the anchoring
of loads.
If possible, avoid having the rear seat
folded down when driving with a heavy
load because the anchoring possibili-
ties are restricted when the rear seat is
in this position.
That the rear seat is
in the upright position is a basic
requirement for protection against
cargo displacement in the event of
a crash.
Cargo can intrude into the passenger
compartment during a sudden stop or
front crash if the outer safety belts are
not fastened. Check that the two red
warning-indication flags are fully
down. This shows that the backrests
are locked.
WARNING
Match the speed and driving style
according to how the car is loaded.
The driving characteristics of the car
can be affected because the center of
gravity is altered when there is a cargo
in the luggage compartment.
An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg) cor-
responds to a weight of 2200 lbs.
(1000 kg) in a head on crash at
32 mph (50 km/h).
Adjust the car’s load (passengers and
luggage) so that the gross vehicle
weight or the axle weight is not
exceeded, see page 252.
127Interior equipment and trunk
On the floor of the luggage compartment
there may be two longitudinal aluminium
rails (CargoTracks™) where accessory
cargo bolts can be mounted.
The cargo bolts are mounted by lifting their
locks and inserting them into the rail. Each
cargo bolt is moved in the following way: pull
up its lock and at the same time move it for-
ward or backward to the desired position.
Items for load anchoring:
Cargo bolts (accessory).
Special load straps (accessory).
Items to keep light objects tidy (accesso-
ries):
Elastic floor cargo net (accessory).
Elastic side cargo net for the right-hand
side of the luggage compartment (acces-
sory).
The elastic nets may only be used to keep
light objects tidy, not for anchoring.
The floor net should be attached to the
cargo bolts that are mounted on the Cargo-
Tracks™. Place the tie down eyes as far for-
ward and as far back as possible on the Car-
goTracks™.
The side netting should be attached to the
two tie down eyes which are included in the
accessory kit and to two of the eyes moun-
ted on the right-hand CargoTrack™ on the
floor.
The cargo bolts, load straps and elastic nets
are stored in the two floor lockers on the
right- and left-hand side of the luggage
compartment. The lockers are opened by
lifting the respective fabric loop.
NOTICE
Do not place any objects so that the
demisting and antenna elements on the
inside of the window could be damaged.
IB1214
Cargo bolts mounted on the longitudinal
rails (if equipped)
IB1216
Example of cargo anchoring
IB1215
Elastic cargo net for lighter objects.
128 Interior equipment and trunk
Cargo net
(option)
Install the net behind the rear seat backrest.
1 Remove the rearmost covers from the
roof.
2 Fasten the attachments at the top of the
net to the two attachment points in the
roof.
3 Secure a lashing eye furthest forward on
each of the CargoTracks (see previous
page). Attach the hooks on the net to
these eyes. Tension the straps.
You can also install the cargo net directly
behind the front seats when the rear seats
are folded.
1 Remove the front covers from the roof.
2 Fasten the attachments at the top of the
net to the two attachment points in the
roof.
3 Wrap each strap around the tube run-
ning under the rear edge of each front
seat and attach the hook to the eye on
the strap.
WARNING
The cargo in the luggage compartment
must be anchored properly, even if the
cargo net is correctly in position. The only
purpose of the net is to prevent light
objects from being thrown about in the
cabin during heavy braking or in the event
of a crash.
IB1217
Cover over the fixing point for the cargo
net
IB1218
Attaching the cargo net to the roof
IB3724
Hook attached to a lashing eye
129Interior equipment and trunk
Sliding load floor
(accessory)
The function of the sliding floor is to facilitate
loading and unloading.
Securing loads, see page 123.
When the car is parked and the floor is
pulled out, it can bear the weight of two
people (maximum 440 lbs./200 kg).
Setting up
1 Lift up the floor.
2 Fold out the support wheels.
3 Set the floor down on the support
wheels.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury take note of the
following:
Do not leave children unsupervised
when the sliding floor is drawn out.
Be aware of the risk of pinching when
handling the sliding floor.
Never drive the car with the sliding
floor pulled out.
Always use the car’s regular cargo
anchoring when transporting a cargo.
Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the anchoring
straps.
The sliding floor must not be changed
or modified in any way.
Put the sliding floor in the folded- down
position when it is not in use.
IB1220
Setting up the sliding floor
130 Interior equipment and trunk
Loading/Unloading
1 Lift the handle and pull out the sliding
floor to the outer locking position. Make
sure that the floor is locked correctly.
2 Put on the cargo, but make sure that it
does not cover the handle.
3 Lift the handle and push in the floor to
the inner locking position. Make sure
that the floor is locked correctly.
4 Tie down the load with Saab’s load
straps according to the instructions, see
page 126.
When the floor is not in use
1 Lift up the floor.
2 Fold down the support wheels.
3 Lay down the sliding floor and make sure
that it is locked in its lower position.
Trunk Release Handle
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from the inside.
NOTICE
The trunk release handle was not desig-
ned to be used to tie down the trunk lid or
as a an anchor point when securing items
in the trunk. Improper use of the trunk
release could damage it.
IB1221
Loading
IB1222
Folding down the sliding floor
IB1833
Trunk Release Handle
131Starting and driving
IB1754
Starting and driving
Ignition switch________ 132
Starting the engine ____ 133
Important considerations
for driving___________ 136
Refueling ____________ 138
Engine Break-In Period_ 142
Gear changing________ 142
Cruise control ________ 151
Braking______________ 152
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)_______ 155
Economical motoring __ 157
Driving in cold weather_ 159
Driving in hot weather _ 160
Towing a trailer _______ 161
Driving with a roof rack
load_________________ 166
Driving at night ________ 168
Driving with a load _____ 168
Driving considerations
with compact spare
wheel/tire fitted _______ 170
Spare wheel and tools __ 170
Driving with the trunk
lid/tailgate open_______ 171
Driving in deep water ___ 171
Towing the car_________ 171
Jump starting _________ 174
Saab Parking Assistance 177
Parking brake _________ 179
Parking_______________ 179
132 Starting and driving
Ignition switch
The combined ignition switch and gear-
lever lock is located in the center console
between the front seats. The ignition key
can only be removed when reverse is
engaged (automatic transmission: selector
in ”P” position).
The key fits all the locks on the car. The key
number is specified on the small plastic
strap that comes with the keys when the car
is delivered. Keep a note of the key number
in a safe place, as you will need to quote it if
ordering a replacement key.
See also page 38.
LOCK position
Engage reverse and turn the key to LOCK.
Automatic transmission: select ”P”.
The gear lever is locked. This is the only position in which the key can be
removed.
The parking lights, hazard warning lights and interior lighting all work.
OFF position
Gear lever no longer locked.
Certain electrical circuits operational
ON position
All electrical circuits working.
Do not leave the key in the ON position
when the engine is not running.
Turn the key to OFF to switch off the
electrical circuits. In the ON position certain warning and indicator lights
come on as a check, and they normally are extinguished after about
3 seconds.
ST (starter) position
The starter operates when the key is turned to this position. When
released, the key will spring back to the ON position. If the engine fails to
start, the key must first be turned back to the position between OFF and
LOCK before the starter can be operated again.
When the starter motor is running, several electrical circuits are
disconnected to facilitate starting.
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
IB1120
133Starting and driving
If the car does not start
If the text
”Key not accepted.
Contact service.”
is shown on the SID, after a failed start
attempt, the cause could be a fault in the
transmitter in the key, or in the receiver in
the ignition lock. The following should be
done:
Turn the key back to the LOCK position.
Turn the key to ON.
Press one of the buttons on the remote
control (the LED stops blinking).
Start the engine.
Try another key. If this works, then the fault
is in the first key.
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for
checking and rectification.
Note:
Certain electronic items, such as cellular
phones, may affect the starting produce-
dure. Be sure that all devices are clear of the
key/ignition switch area.
Starting the engine
NOTICE
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
liquid gets into it, the switch may not
operate properly.
WARNING
Always remove the key before leaving
the car.
Always apply the parking brake before
removing the ignition key.
WARNING
When starting the engine:
Sit down in the driver’s seat.
Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the
gear lever is not in the neutral position,
the clutch pedal must be fully depres-
sed or the car will jump forwards or
backwards, which may cause a crash.
Never start the car from outside the
vehicle, e.g. through a wound down
window. This could lead to serious
personal injury.
Engage reverse (R) (position P for
automatic transmission) to remove the
ignition key. The key can only be
removed in this gear position.
Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
the danger of CO – always open the
garage doors before starting the
engine in the garage.
There is also a danger of CO poiso-
ning if the exhaust system is leaking.
134 Starting and driving
It is possible for air to enter the lubricating
system in conjunction with an oil or oil-filter
change, or if the car has been stored for
some time. This air can cause the hydraulic
cam followers to emit a ticking noise, which
can persist for up to 15 minutes after start-
ing. Although this is quite normal and does
not indicate any malfunction, it is advisable
not to exceed 3,000 rpm before the noise
has disappeared.
The hydraulic cam lifters are completely
service free; the valve clearance is set up at
the factory and will not need any subse-
quent adjustment.
Starting the engine
Avoid racing the engine or putting a heavy
load on it before it has warmed up. Drive
away as soon as the oil warning light has
been extinguished to enable the engine to
attain its normal temperature as quickly as
possible.
The engine has an automatic choke and
should be started as follows:
Cars with manual transmission
To start the engine the clutch pedal must
be fully depressed.
1 Depress the clutch pedal fully but do not
touch the accelerator.
2 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly – at very
low temperatures, you may need to run
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait
20–30 seconds before running the star-
ter again, to give the battery time to reco-
ver.
Note:
On cars with manual transmission, if the
starter fails to engage when the ignition key
is turned to the start position, make sure the
clutch pedal is full depressed. Misposi-
tioned floor mats or other obstructions
under the clutch pedal may affect starting.
Let the engine idle for about 10 seconds. Do
not open the throttle wide for at least 2–
3 minutes after starting.
Cars with automatic transmission
1 The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
3 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly – at very
low temperatures, you may need to run
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait
20–30 seconds before running the star-
ter again, to give the battery time to reco-
ver.
Let the engine idle for about 10 seconds. Do
not open the throttle wide for at least
2–3 minutes after starting.
The tail pipe of the exhaust system
can become very hot during driving.
Bear this in mind when loading and
unloading the car.
Do not rest or sleep in the car when
parked with the engine running. There
is a risk of depressing the accelerator
which could lead to engine damage.
135Starting and driving
Useful tips on cold climate
starting
If the engine has failed to start after several
attempts in very cold weather, press and
hold the accelerator down to the floor and
run the starter for 5–10 seconds. This will
prevent the engine being flooded (exces-
sively rich fuel-air mixture).
Now start the engine in the normal way – do
not touch the accelerator.
If the engine stalls immediately after starting
(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
do not touch the accelerator when restarting
the engine.
Limp-home mode
The engine management system has a
diagnostic feature that continually checks a
number of internal functions. If, for example,
a fault is detected in the throttle valve, the
engine management system will go into
Limp-home mode.This limits idling control,
disables the cruise-control system and
limits the capacity of the A/C compressor.
If the limp-home mode is in operation
(”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
light on, see below) and the outside temper-
ature is close to or below freezing, you may
need to use some throttle on starting (some
pressure on the accelerator).
If the diagnostic system has detected a fault
in the engine-management system, the
”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
light on the main instrument panel will
come on (see page 55), indicating that you
should have the car checked as soon as
possible by an authorized Saab dealer.
NOTICE
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light
starts to flash, ease off the accelerator
slightly. If the light does not cease to flash
within 5 seconds, stop the car in a suita-
ble place as soon as possible and turn off
the engine. The car must be towed to an
authorized Saab dealer.
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light flas-
hes, it indicates that the engine is misfi-
ring which can result in damage to the
catalytic converter.
136 Starting and driving
Important
considerations for
driving
The engine-management system in the
Saab 9-5 is called Saab Trionic T7. The
system manages the ignition, fuel injection
and turbo boost pressure.
The Trionic T7 system developed by Saab
is an intelligent engine-management
system designed to achieve optimum driv-
ability under differing driving conditions.
The system makes adjustments automati-
cally, for instance, if the car is being driven
at altitude (oxygen-deficient air), for differ-
ent grades of fuel (AON 87–93) and for dif-
ferent load conditions.
1 Starting and driving
Refrain from using full throttle before
the engine has warmed up (before
needle in mid-range on temperature
gauge).
A safety function prevents the engine
from revving faster than 6,000 rpm by
limiting the induction air.
2 Stopping the engine
Do not rev the engine immediately
before switching it off – stop the engine
when it is idling.
3 Regulating the boost pressure
One of the advantages of boost pres-
sure regulation is that the engine can
also be run safely on gasoline with a
lower octane rating, although not lower
than AON 87. However, engine perfor-
mance will fall slightly and heavy load-
ing and laboring should be avoided. For
optimum performance, use the recom-
mended grade of fuel.
The maximum boost pressure is adjus-
ted automatically to the knocking or
pinging tendency of the engine. Occa-
sional, short-lived knocking when the
engine is under a heavy load is per-
fectly normal; the extent will depend on
the grade of fuel in the tank.
Isolated instances of knocking are
more likely to occur with low-octane
fuel. This controlled form of knocking,
followed by a reduction in the boost
pressure, is a sign that the wastegate is
functioning and is perfectly safe for the
engine.
NOTICE
If the engine sounds strange there is a
fault in the system. Have the car
checked without delay by an authori-
zed Saab dealer.
The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.
WARNING
If the engine is being run with the car on a
rolling road or dynamometer, longer than
for a standard state emission inspection,
to ensure adequate cooling, air must be
blown into the engine compartment and
under the car at a rate equivalent to the
ram-air effect that would be obtained at
the corresponding road speed.
137Starting and driving
Important considerations with
catalytic converters
The catalytic converter is an emission-con-
trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
system. It consists of a metal canister with a
honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
walls coated in a catalytic layer (mixture of
precious metals).
To ensure that the catalytic converter con-
tinues to function properly, and also to avoid
damage to the converter and its associated
components, the following points must be
observed:
Have the car serviced regularly in accor-
dance with the service program. The fuel
and ignition systems are particularly
important in this context.
Always be alert to any misfiring of the
engine (not running on all cylinders) and
any loss of power or performance. At the
first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
and take the car to an authorized Saab
dealer as soon as possible.
If the engine fails to start (in very cold
weather or if the battery is flat), the car can
be push started (manual gearbox only) or
started using jumper cables to a donor
battery. However, as soon as you have
started the engine, it is important that it
runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
it to idle for up to five minutes to give it time
to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
time, the engine still fails to run properly,
turn off the engine and get in touch with
an authorized Saab dealer for advice.
Never park the car on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic con-
verter gets very hot and could therefore
start a fire.
Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
If you jump start the car when the engine
is already up to normal temperature, the
engine must start to run on all cylinders.
Stop jump-starting if the engine fails to
start immediately.
Failure to follow these directions could
result in the catalytic converter and associ-
ated components being damaged, and
could represent a breach of the warranty
conditions.
NOTICE
Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded
gasoline is detrimental to the catalyst and
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
the function of the catalytic converter.
NOTICE
If the car runs out of fuel, it is possible for
air to get into the fuel system. If this
happens, the catalytic converter may
overheat and be damaged.
IB1289
2
2
1
3
3
Oxygen-sensor-controlled
injection system
1 Engine control module
2 Oxygen sensor (lambda probe)
3 Catalytic converters
138 Starting and driving
Refueling
WARNING
If you spill fuel and then something ignites
it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. This spray can happen if your
tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot
weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Gasoline fumes are highly explosive.
Therefore:
never
smoke while refueling
never
use gasoline for any purpose
other than as engine fuel
gasoline is extremely flammable and
can cause severe burns. No open or
exposed flames near gasoline
do not
use a mobile phone at the
same time as refueling.
NOTICE
Do not overfill. Fuel should not come
right up the filler pipe as room for
expansion is needed for when the
temperature rises.
The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as
soon as possible.
NOTICE
The engine control module (ECM) moni-
toring the engine parameters also stores
fault codes.
Under certain circumstances, this may
cause constant illumination of the ”Eng-
ine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
lamp , thus indicating a fault that
must be checked by your Saab dealer,
see page 55.
NOTE: always observe the following two
measures:
Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
screwed on correctly before the
engine is started. Screw on the fuel
filler cap until you hear 3 distinct
clicks.
Avoid driving with the fuel low level
indicator illuminated. The symbol
illuminates when less than approx-
imately 2 gallons (8 litres) of fuel
remains in the tank.
139Starting and driving
Refueling
1 Switch off the engine.
2 Open the filler cap, located in the right-
hand rear fender.
3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the
flange on the filler pipe and let the first
mark (a ring, a pimple or the first spring-
coil) rest on the flange. Do not withdraw
the nozzle while filling is in progress.
4 Cease refueling the first time the pump
stops, and wait a few seconds after
you´ve finished pumping before you
remove the nozzle.
Filler cap
When you put the filler cap back on, turn it
to the right (clockwise) until you hear
three
clicks. Make sure you fully install the cap.
The most effective way to prevent conden-
sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
possible running problems) is to keep the
tank well filled.
Before the onset of freezing temperatures in
winter, it may be advisable to add gasoline
anti-freeze to the fuel a few times to dispel
any condensation in the system..
The fuel door has a built in filler cap holder
slot located on the fuel door. Slide the white
ring on the cap into the slot.
Notice:
If you need a new fuel cap, be sure
to get the right type. Your dealer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly
WARNING
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by notify-
ing the station attendant. Leave the area
immediately.
NOTICE
Fill to maximum filling capacity
Stop filling after the first time that the
nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.
Filling capacity can differ between
different fuel stations and outside
temperature. Fuel tank volume when
nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by
0.5 gal. (2 liters).
Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler
pipe. The gasoline must be allowed
room for expansion especially during
hot weather.
When refueling, hang the filler cap inside
the fuel door
140 Starting and driving
Filling a portable fuel container Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an impor-
tant part of the proper maintenance of your
vehicle.
For optimum performance Saab recom-
mends:
2.3t 185 hp (Linear) – AON 90.
2.3T 220 hp (Arc) and
2.3 Turbo 250 hp (Aero) – AON 93.
Gasoline Octane
For the 2.3T and 2.3 Turbo, use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
93 or higher for best performance. For the
2.3t, use a mid-grade with a posted octane
of 90 for best performance. You may also
use regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, but your vehicle's
acceleration may be slightly reduced. If the
octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you
might damage your engine. A little pinging
noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is
considered normal. This does not indicate a
problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel
is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or
higher-octane fuel and hear heavy knock-
ing, your engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet spec-
ifications which were developed by automo-
bile manufacturers around the world and
contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter
which is available from the Alliance of Auto-
mobile Manufacturers at www.autoalli-
ance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meet-
ing these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control
system performance compared to other
gasoline.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emission Standards (see the underhood
emission control label), it is designed to
operate on fuels that meet California speci-
fications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on
fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE) on page 55. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel
used, repairs may not be covered by your
warranty.
WARNING
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly
burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed or on any surface other than the
ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before opera-
ting the nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is complete.
Do not smoke while pumping gaso-
line.
141Starting and driving
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the
United States are now required to contain
additives that will help prevent engine and
fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
your emission control system to work prop-
erly. You should not have to add anything to
your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive
required to meet U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency regulations. Saab recom-
mends that you buy gasolines that are
advertised to help keep fuel injectors and
intake valves clean. If your vehicle experi-
ences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gaso-
lines may be available in your area to con-
tribute to clean air. Saab recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they
comply with the specifications described
earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed
for fuel that contains methanol. Do not
use fuel containing methanol. It can cor-
rode metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be cove-
red under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated
for low emissions may contain an octane-
enhancing additive called methylcyclopen-
tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask
the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. Saab does
not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country out-
side the United States or Canada, the
proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use
leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recom-
mended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto
club, or contact a major oil company that
does business in the country where you will
be driving.
142 Starting and driving
Engine Break-In Period
Pistons, bores and bearings need time to
obtain uniform, wear-resistant surfaces.
If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-
ual process of bedding-in will not be possi-
ble and the life of the engine will be short-
ened.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), do
not exceed 5,000 rpm.
In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
throttle, other than for brief instances,
during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).
Wearing in new brake pads
New brake pads take time to bed in, about
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
under stop-and-go conditions or about
300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
hard braking as much as possible during
this period.
Gear changing
Manual transmission
To start the engine the clutch pedal must
be fully depressed.
The gear positions are marked on the gear
lever. Before reverse (R) can be engaged,
you must lift the ring underneath the gear-
lever knob.
To change gear, fully depress the clutch
pedal and then release it smoothly. It is
inadvisable to drive with your hand resting
on the gear lever, as this can increase the
wear on the transmission.
When changing down from 5th to 4th gear,
ease the gear lever straight back, without
applying any lateral pressure. This will pre-
vent 2nd gear being engaged by mistake,
which can result in overreving and possible
damage to the engine.
Before engaging reverse, wait till the car is
at a standstill, release the accelerator and
fully depress the clutch. From neutral, press
the gear lever firmly to the right before
easing it back into reverse.
143Starting and driving
Towing
Towing of cars with manual transmission,
see page 171.
Automatic transmission
The electronic control module for the auto-
matic transmission receives information on
engine torque and road speed, and also
controls the hydraulic pressure in the trans-
mission to ensure that gear changing is as
smooth as possible.
The position of the selector lever is shown
by the symbols adjacent to the lever and
also by an indicator on the main instrument
panel. If manual mode (M) is selected, the
current gear is also displayed on the main
instrument panel.
The ignition key can only be removed when
the selector lever is in the P position.
NOTICE
When the reverse gear is to be engaged
the car must be at a standstill with the
accelerator fully released. Lift the reverse
lock-out collar and push the gear lever
firmly to the right in neutral before easing
it into reverse.
WARNING
Make it a habit to keep your foot on the
brake when selecting a drive position,
to prevent the car from creeping for-
ward (or backward if reverse is selec-
ted).
The car must be at a standstill before
P, R or N is selected. You have to have
your foot on the brake pedal to move
the lever out of P. If the car is still
moving when a drive position is subse-
quently selected, this could cause a
crash or damage the automatic trans-
mission.
Never park the car with the selector
lever in a drive position, even if the
parking brake is on.
If you want to leave the car with the
engine running, move the selector
lever to P or N and apply the parking
brake.
Selector lever
IB471
1
3
2
5
R
4
144 Starting and driving
When the car is stationary, the engine must
be at idling speed when the selector lever is
moved.
You must have your foot on the brake
pedal to move the lever out of park.
If the accelerator is depressed while the
lever is moved, this will result in abnormal
wear in the transmission.
The detent button on the selector lever has
to be pressed before the selector can be
moved between certain positions.
Three modes for the automatic transmis-
sion can be selected: Normal, Manual and
Sport.
Normal mode
The Normal mode, which provides the best
fuel economy, is the default setting when
the engine is started.
Manual mode (Sentronic): see page 148.
Sport mode
When the Sport mode is selected, the throt-
tle angle is altered to provide more power at
the same throttle setting. The transmission
also changes up later than in Normal mode
to provide higher performance. In this
mode, the SPORT indicator will appear on
the main instrument panel (see page 150).
Adaptive gear-change pattern
Adaptive gear-change pattern is a transmis-
sion function in the Normal and Sport
modes which matches gear changing to
current driving conditions. The transmission
control module senses the load on the
engine and temperature of the transmis-
sion. A suitable gear change pattern is then
selected automatically to avoid unneces-
sary gear changes and undesired tempera-
ture increases in the transmission.
NOTICE
After selecting a drive position, pause
briefly to allow the gear to engage (the car
starts to pull a little) before you accel-
erate.
Detent positions for selector movement Selector-lever indicator on main instru-
ment panel
145Starting and driving
Lock-up function
The automatic transmission has a lock-up
function, which can render the torque con-
verter inoperative in 3rd, 4th and 5th gears,
thus reducing the engine speed and fuel
consumption.
When the lock-up function comes into oper-
ation, it may give the impression of an over-
drive being engaged.
Kick-down
When the accelerator is pressed down hard,
a change-down to the next gear will be
effected to provide maximum acceleration,
e.g. for overtaking.
Following this, the next higher gear will be
selected at the optimum engine speed for
acceleration or, if you ease off the acceler-
ator, before reaching this.
Park Brake Shift Lock
The transmission has a security function
known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move
the gear selector out of the P position, the
brake pedal must be depressed at the same
time as the gear selector catch (detent) is
pressed in.
Shift Lock override
Check fuse No. 1 (see page 213). If the
problem was cured by changing the fuse or
battery, you do not have to contact a Saab
dealer.
If the fuse blows again as soon as the Shift
Lock feature is activated you should contact
your Saab dealer.
If the fuse is OK, check the battery regarding
the voltage.
1 Apply the parking brake
2 Make sure the key is in position ON
3 Use a small tool such as a screwdriver
and push the lever (see picture) down-
wards so that the detent button can be
pressed approx. 10 mm
4 Move the selector out of position P to N
5 Remove the tool
6 Release the parking brake if the car is to
be moved immediately; otherwise keep
it applied.
NOTICE
Due to electrical problems it may not be
possible to move the selector out of the
park position, even if the ignition is ON. If
for some reason the selector has to be
moved out of the park position (i.e. to tow
the car a short distance) do as described
below.
146 Starting and driving
If ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”
light appears on the main instrument panel,
the system has detected a fault in the auto-
matic transmission or its control module
(see page 57).
This also means that the Limp-home mode
has been selected, to guard against further
damage being done to the transmission. In
this mode, the automatic transmission
starts in 5th gear, and gear changes (if nec-
essary) will have to be made manually.
Stop the car in a safe place. Switch off then
restart the engine. If the fault is intermittent,
the transmission will operate as normal
despite the fault indicator being on. Have
the car checked at an authorized Saab
dealer.
It is not possible to select the SPORT or
Sentronic mode when the Limp-home mode
is active.
Gear changes must be made manually.
The following gears will be engaged in the
respective selector positions when the auto-
matic transmission is in Limp-home mode:
Overheated transmission fluid
If the automatic-transmission fluid should
overheat, the following message will appear
on the SID:
”Gearbox too hot.
Make a safe stop.
In this event, stop the car in a suitable place,
switch off the engine and open the hood.
Wait for several minutes then turn on the
ignition to check that the message has gone
out. When driving subsequent to the trans-
mission fluid overheating, select a gear in
which the engine speed is about 3,000 rpm.
Overheating of the automatic-transmission
fluid can occur when the car is towing a
heavy load, such as a camping trailer in hilly
country. High ambient temperatures can
also increase the temperature of the trans-
mission fluid or the oil cooler may be faulty.
Contact an authorized Saab dealer (see
also page 161).
Automatic transmission,
fault indicator
Position R D M L
Gear Reverse 5th 5th 2nd
NOTICE
If the control module has actuated the
Limp-home function for the automatic
transmission, the car will remain in 5th
gear when D is selected, making it very
sluggish.
Select position L to prevent unnecessary
wear on the transmission. The transmis-
sion then starts in 2nd gear. Once the car
is moving you can select position D.
When the indicator light is on, the car
must not be driven with a caravan or trai-
ler attached.
147Starting and driving
Driving on hilly roads with a
heavy load
The transmission fluid can overheat when
the gearbox is strained, for example, when
driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid
the transmission fluid overheating, always
drive in Normal mode. The adaptive gear
change patterns are then active.
High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler
can also cause the transmission fluid to
overheat. Overheating reduces the service
life of the fluid. Contact an authorized Saab
dealer (see also page 161).
Towing
Towing of cars with automatic transmission,
see page 171.
Descending hills
If the speed of the car increases while
descending a steep hill, despite the acceler-
ator being released, the control module will
change down a gear when you brake. If you
desire more powerful engine braking, man-
ually select a lower gear.
WARNING
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position D or L) to spare the brakes
when you are driving on a long or steep
downhill slope.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!
148 Starting and driving
Sentronic, manual mode
Move the selector lever to the M position.
Select a higher gear by flicking the right-
hand paddle towards you. Select a
lower gear by flicking the left-hand paddle
towards you.
An example of when you may wish to make
manual gear changes is when overtaking, to
enable you to remain in a low gear for an
extended period of time.
Changes from 3rd to 4th and from 4th to 5th
can be made when the engine speed is
above roughly 2,000 rpm.
If you select a gear that is judged too high by
the system, the selected gear position will
be shown briefly on the main instrument
panel and then the gear that is actually
engaged.
If the road surface is slippery, you may wish
to pull off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of
wheel spin.
When descending hills you should select a
low gear to increase the braking effect of the
engine and thus spare the brakes.
Manual gear selections are shown on the
main instrument panel. The selector posi-
tion and the current gear are displayed.
When the selector lever is in the M position,
as opposed to the D position, engines are
much more responsive to changes in acce-
lerator position. The accelerator has a diffe-
rent feel.
When in manual mode, kick-down operates
for 4th and 5th gears (below 2,000 rpm).
Kick-down cannot be activated in 1st, 2nd or
3rd gears.
For optimum performance, gear changes
should be made before reaching 6,000 rpm.
To avoid damaging the engine and trans-
mission, the transmission will shift up a gear
if the engine is in danger of overrevving. You
may feel a slight jolt before this gear change
is effected.
Paddles on the steering wheel for
changing gear manually
149Starting and driving
Selector positions
P
To shift out of the P position you must
depress the brake pedal and the ignition
must be ON.
The parking position (P) must only be selected
when the car is at a complete standstill. The
selector lever is locked and the transmission is
mechanically immobilized. Always apply the
parking brake after parking the car.
The engine can be started. The key can be
removed.
R
The reverse (R) position must only be selected
when the car is at a complete standstill. The
detent-release button must be pressed before
the selector lever can be moved to R. Wait until
reverse gear has engaged (car starts to creep)
before touching the accelerator.
N
In the Neutral position (N), the transmission is
disengaged from the engine. The engine can be
started, but first ensure that the parking brake is
on, to prevent the car from moving off unexpec-
tedly.
To prevent the engine and transmission from
becoming hotter than necessary, select N for
stops other than brief ones, e.g. if stuck in a traf-
fic jam.
The normal drive position (D) is recommended
for waiting at traffic lights.
D
The Drive position (D) is the position for normal
motoring. Gear changes between 1st and 5th
will take place automatically, the timing of which
is determined by the throttle (accelerator) posi-
tion and the speed of the car.
After moving the selector lever to D, pause to
give the gear time to engage (car starts to pull).
M
Move the selector lever from position D to M to
allow you to change gear manually. Refer to
page 148.
L
Select position L if you wish to drive in 1st gear.
No upchanges will be made if you pull off in posi-
tion L. If you move the selector lever from posi-
tion D or M to L at a high vehicle speed, the
transmission will automatically shift down
through 4th, 3rd and 2nd gears to 1st gear,
depending on the car’s speed. Use this position
for descending steep hills if the car is heavily loa-
ded to spare the brakes.
150 Starting and driving
If you move the selector lever from D to L, down shifts will follow a
set pattern to avoid damaging the engine or transmission.
Manual gear-changing is not recommended on slippery roads.
If one of the drive wheels spins excessively, the engine torque will
be reduced to avoid damaging the transmission.
Adaptive gear-change patterns
Adaptive gear-change patterns are selected automatically depend-
ing on the engine load and the present temperature of the transmis-
sion. The function is available in Normal and Sport modes.
The changes occur at a higher engine speed and the car remains in
the same gear for longer, if the transmission control module senses
that the load has not decreased. These gear-change patterns pre-
vent unnecessary changing up and down, when for example driving
up or down long slopes with a trailer or caravan, and to prevent over-
heating the transmission oil. The adaptive gear-change function is
also selected automatically when the transmission oil becomes too
hot, to protect the transmission itself from damage and to lower the
oil temperature.
The adaptive gear-change pattern function is deselected when:
The engine is switched off.
The load is reduced so much that the function is no longer requi-
red.
”Automatic transmission, fault indicator” appears on main
instrument panel, see page 146.
SPORT modes
To select Sport mode, press the ”S” button on
the selector lever when the selector lever is in
position N or D.
In this mode, gear changes will take place at hig-
her engine speeds than in Normal mode, in
other words, the transmission will change up
later and change down earlier for the same
throttle (accelerator) position.
The Sport mode will be deselected if:
The S button is pressed.
The selector lever is moved to position P,R, M
or L.
The engine is switched off.
”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”
appears on main instrument panel, see
page 146.
151Starting and driving
Cruise control
For safety reasons (brake system func-
tion) the brakes must be applied once,
when the engine has started, before the
cruise control system can be activated
.
The system is operated by means of the
controls on the stalk switch:
ON/OFF (switch on/off).
RESUME/– (Resume preset speed).
SET/+ (to set the desired speed).
CANCEL (Cancel operation of system,
e.g. to reduce speed temporarily).
When the system is ON, the CRUISE indi-
cator light will appear on the main instru-
ment panel and will be extinguished when
the system is switched OFF. If CANCEL is
selected, CRUISE will flash once.
To set the desired speed
Move the switch to ON. Accelerate to the
desired speed (minimum speed: 25 mph
(40 km/h))and press SET/+.
To increase the preset speed
Accelerate to the desired speed and press
SET/+.
You can also increase the speed of the car
using the SET/+ button. Press it once to
increase the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) or
hold it in and release when the desired
speed is reached.
Temporary increase in speed
Press the accelerator to override the preset
speed, e.g. for overtaking.
When you release the accelerator, the
system will revert to the preset speed.
To cancel temporarily
Move the control stalk to CANCEL (spring-
loaded position before OFF position). This
will disengage the system but the preset
speed will be retained in the system mem-
ory. (The memory is deleted when the
engine is switched off.)
To re-engage the system
To revert to the preset speed, slide the
switch to RESUME/–. This will only operate
when the car’s speed is above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
WARNING
Do not use the Cruise control system
on wet or icy roads, in dense traffic or
on winding roads.
Set the control to OFF when you do
not want to use the system, to prevent
the system being activated inadver-
tently.
IB1593
Cruise-control switches
152 Starting and driving
To reduce the preset speed
The cruise control system will always disen-
gage automatically the moment that either
the brake pedal or the clutch pedal is
depressed.
It is also possible to reduce the speed by
means of the RESUME/– button.
Sliding the button to RESUME/– once will
reduce the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Holding the button in the RESUME/– posi-
tion will effect a gradual reduction in speed
until the button is released.
Disengaging the system
The system will be disengaged:
When the brake or clutch pedal is depres-
sed.
When the switch is moved to CANCEL.
When the switch is moved to OFF.
When the engine is switched off.
When the selector lever is moved to posi-
tion N (cars with automatic transmission).
When the ESP system is operative for
more than 1 second.
Braking
To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
(e.g. when negotiating long descents with a
drop of several hundred feet), select a low
gear to use the braking effect of the engine.
If the car has automatic transmission, move
the selector lever to position D or L.
When driving fast, you can help to prolong
the life of the brakes by thinking ahead and
braking harder for short periods, rather than
braking more moderately over long
stretches.
Brake pad wear indicators
The outboard brake pads on the front
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
When the lining is down to 3 mm, the pad
will produce a screeching, squealing or
scraping noise when the brakes are applied.
New pads should be fitted without delay.
Brake pads should only be replaced by
an authorized Saab dealer.
To ensure optimum brake performance,
it is recommended that you use only
Saab original brake pads.
153Starting and driving
ABS brakes
ABS (antilock braking system) modulates
the brake pressure to the respective
wheels. Wheel sensors detect if a wheel is
about to lock, and the control module redu-
ces the pressure to that wheel and then
increases it once more until the tendency is
detected again.
The brake system is equipped with an Elec-
tronic Brake-force Distribution device
(EBD), which distributes the brake pressure
between the front and rear wheels, in such
a way as to achieve optimum braking perfor-
mance irrespective of the car’s speed and
load.
WARNING
It is prudent to try your brakes from
time to time, especially when driving in
heavy rain, through water collected on
the road, in snow, on a wet road sur-
face or in salty slush. In such condi-
tions, the brakes may take longer than
normal to take effect. To rectify this,
touch the brake pedal periodically to
dry the brakes out.
The same applies after the car has
been washed or when the weather is
very humid.
Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
Before parking, and if the traffic condi-
tions allow, brake quite heavily so that
the brake discs and pads warm up and
dry.
The brakes are power assisted and it
should be kept in mind that the servo
unit only provides the power assis-
tance when the engine is running.
The brake pressure required when the
engine is off,(e.g. when the car is
being towed) is roughly four times the
normal pedal force required. The
pedal also feels hard and unre-
sponsive.
WARNING
The additional safety afforded by the
ABS system is not designed to allow
drivers to drive faster but to make
normal driving safer.
To stop as quickly as possible, without
loss of directional stability, whether
the road surface is dry, wet or slippery,
press the brake pedal down hard-
without letting up (do not pump the
pedal),
declutching simultan-
eously, and steer the car to safety.
154 Starting and driving
The ABS system has a built-in diagnostic
function which will switch on the Anti-lock
brake warning light if a fault is detected in
the system (see page 54).
The ABS system will not reduce the braking
distance on loose gravel or on snow or ice
but, because the wheels cannot lock up,
some steering control is retained.
When the ABS system is working, i.e. mod-
ulation of the brake pressure is in progress,
the brake pedal will pulsate and a ticking
noise will be heard. All this is perfectly nor-
mal.
Press the pedal
down hard
(you cannot
press too hard) and steer the car to safety.
Do not release the brake pedal before the
car has come to a halt or the danger has
passed!
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
operate even when only light pressure is
applied to the pedal. This means that you
can brake gently to test the condition of the
road and adapt your driving accordingly.
It is well worth practicing the use of ABS
brakes on a skid pad or other suitable
facility.
IB476
Braking with ABS brakes.
When the system is operating, the brake
pedal will pulsate gently and the system
will make a ticking noise.
IB477
Braking with ABS – evasive steering
155Starting and driving
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
The Electronic Stability Program employs
both the antilock braking system (ABS) and
the traction control system (TCS). It is a
system that helps the driver to stabilize the
car in unusual circumstances that can oth-
erwise be difficult to handle.
How the ESP system works
The Electronic Stability Program can help to
prevent the car from skidding by braking
one or several wheels independently of the
driver. The engine output is then also
reduced to prevent the driving wheels from
spinning. The car has sensors that measure
wheel speed, yaw acceleration, lateral
acceleration, steering wheel position and
braking pressure. The values provided by
these sensors are used to calculate the
actual direction of the car. If this direction
does not agree with that intended by the
driver, calculated from the steering wheel
position, the ESP is engaged.
ESP improves the driver’s chances of
retaining control over the car in critical situ-
ations.
To ensure that the system works as
designed, the dimensions of all four tires
must be the same.
WARNING
When driving normally, ESP will help to
improve the stability of the car. This does
not mean that car can be driven faster.
The same care and prudence as normally
applied should be displayed on cornering
and when driving on slippery roads.
IB1841
Increased stability with ESP.
The system applies the brakes to the
wheels as shown to help prevent the car
from skidding
156 Starting and driving
ESP indicator light
The indicator light in the tachometer
comes on for a short period of time when the
ESP system is operative.
Operation of the ESP indicates reduced
cohesion between the tires and the road,
and that extra care should be taken by the
driver.
ESP OFF
The light in the rev counter comes on
if:
A fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off.
The system has been switched off manu-
ally.
When the ignition key is turned to the ON
position, the lamp is lit for about four
seconds while the system undergoes a
self-test.
Turning ESP off
The system can be turned off manually with
the ESP button, whereupon the light
on the main instrument panel will come on.
The ESP system cannot be switched off if
the car is travelling faster than 35 mph
(60 km/h).
The ESP is always operative during brak-
ing, even if it has been switched off manu-
ally.
NOTICE
Suspension modifications, such as
changing the type of wheels, dampers or
springs, can affect the function of the ESP
system.
Always consult a Saab dealer before
changing any suspension components.
IB3051
157Starting and driving
Economical motoring
Factors affecting fuel
consumption
Fuel consumption is greatly affected by the
general driving conditions, the way in which
the car is driven and at what speeds, the
weather, the state of the road, the condition
of the car, etc.
Breaking-in
Fuel consumption may be somewhat higher
during the break-in period (the first 3,000–
4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km) than stated.
Weather conditions
Fuel consumption can be as much as 10 %
lower in summer than in winter. The higher
consumption in cold weather is explained by
the longer time it takes for the engine to
reach normal operating temperature, and
for the transmission and wheel bearings to
warm up. Fuel economy is also affected by
the distance driven: short journeys of
3–5 miles (5–8 km) do not give the engine
enough time to reach normal temperature.
Strong winds can also affect fuel con-
sumption.
How to read the graph above:
If fuel consumption with the engine at
normal temperature is 28 mpg
(10l/100 km), the actual fuel consumption 3
miles (5 km) after the engine has started
from cold will be:
23.5 mpg (12l/100 km) at outside temp. of
68°F (20°C) (increase of 20 %).
17.7 mpg (16l/100 km) at outside temp. of
32°F (0°C) (increase of 60 %).
14 mpg (20l/100 km)) at outside temp. of
–4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100 %).
As can be seen, both the distance travelled
by the car and the outside temperature have
a major impact on fuel consumption after
the engine has started from cold. Thus, if the
car is mainly used for short journeys of
3–5 miles (5–8 km), the fuel consumption
will be 60–80 % higher than normal.
IB311
Percentage increase in fuel consumption
of engine starting from cold compared to
engine at normal temperature.
158 Starting and driving
Driving technique
To obtain the best running economy, not
only regarding fuel consumption but
general wear also, regular service is
required.
High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
heavy braking and much low gear work all
gives rise to higher fuel consumption.
Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
in cold weather, the use of studded tires
and roof racks, and towing a trailer all
increase fuel consumption.
Do not run the engine when the car is sta-
tionary.
If idling, it will take much longer before the
engine becomes hot. Engine wear is gre-
atest during this warming-up phase. The-
refore drive away as soon as possible
after the engine is started and avoid high
revving.
Driving in a low gear results in higher fuel
consumption than in a high gear because
of the higher engine speed for a given
road speed. Always change up to a higher
gear as soon as traffic conditions allow
and use the highest gear as much as pos-
sible.
Check the air pressure in the tires once a
month. Incorrect pressures increase tire
wear. It is better to have slightly higher
pressure than lower.
Check fuel consumption regularly.
Increased consumption can indicate that
something is wrong and that the car
needs to be checked by an authorized
Saab dealer.
Practical trials on the roads have demon-
strated that substantial savings in fuel con-
sumption can be made if the above advice
is heeded.
Road conditions
Wet roads increase fuel consumption, as do
unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
less than the additional amount required to
climb the hill).
WARNING
Never switch the engine off while driving
as the effect of the brakes and power ste-
ering will be greatly reduced.
159Starting and driving
Engine block heater
(standard equipment in Canada, acces-
sory in U.S.)
The following are just some of the benefits
to the car and the environment of using an
engine block heater:
Lower fuel consumption.
Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
over short runs.
Reduced wear on the engine.
Inside of car warms up faster.
The engine heater is effective at outside
temperatures up to +15–20°C. The warmer
it is outside, the shorter the time the engine
heater needs to be connected. Longer than
1.5 hours is unnecessary.
If the car is equipped with a removable,
electrical cabin heater that is not in use, this
should be stored in the luggage compart-
ment.
Driving in cold weather
Before starting a journey in cold weather
you should check the following:
That the wiper blades have not become
frozen to the windshield/glass.
Brush any snow away from the air intake
for the heater system (opening between
hood and windshield).
It may be advisable to lubricate the door-
lock cylinder (use molybdenum
disulphide, MoS
2
) to prevent its freezing.
If the lock has frozen, take care not to
break the key (or use the remote control)
– heat it first or spray it with de-icer.
Periodically during the winter, add gaso-
line anti-freeze to the fuel to dispel any
condensation in the fuel tank which could
freeze and cause problems in the system.
Keep the tank well filled to reduce the risk
of condensation forming.
If the car is parked outside in freezing
weather, fuel additives (gasoline anti-
freeze) will not do any good as it cannot
remove water that has already frozen.
Park the car in a warm place so that any
ice that may have built up melts, then add
gasoline anti-freeze when filling up the
tank. Condensation is caused by changes
in the outdoor temperature or by the car
being parked alternately in a garage and
outside.
It is particularly important when the roads
are slippery that the brakes and tires be in
good condition.
Check the anti-freeze in the engine coo-
lant, see page 188.
The car´s trip computer will warn you when
there is a risk of slippery conditions. For fur-
ther information on this function, see
page 62.
The car is equipped with tires designed to
provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
roads, although this has been achieved at
the expense of somewhat reduced grip on
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
and ice, we therefore recommend that
winter (snow) tires be fitted.
Winter (snow) tires, particularly studded
tires (where use is legally permitted), gener-
ally make driving safer on snow and ice.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of different
types of winter tires and snow chains.
Studded tires are not allowed in some
countries
.
160 Starting and driving
If winter tires are fitted, the same type must
be fitted on all wheels. Your Saab dealer will
be pleased to advise you on the best tires for
your car.
Remember that tires age. It may therefore
be necessary to change them before they
reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually
lose their friction properties.
The best response if the car gets into a front-
wheel skid is to freewheel (manual gearbox
only), i.e. disengage the clutch (so that the
wheels are neither driven or retarded by the
engine.
If the car has automatic transmission, ease
up on the accelerator and steer carefully in
the desired direction.
In a rear-wheel skid, steer in the same direc-
tion that the rear of the car is moving.
Tire chains
If you want to fit tire chains (where legally
permitted) they should only be fitted to the
tires recommended under ”Specifications”
(see page 260).
Consult your Saab dealer for details of
approved tire chains.
Driving in hot weather
Always check the coolant level before
starting a journey. The level should be just
below the MAX mark.
At the end of a journey, if the engine has
worked hard, allow it to idle for two or
three minutes before switching it off.
If the needle on the temperature gauge
enters the red zone:
1 Bring the car to a standstill but leave the
engine running. Do
not
remove the cap
on the expansion tank even if the tank is
empty. If the needle on the temperature
gauge continues to rise while the engine
is idling, switch off the engine.
WARNING
Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h)
when tire chains are fitted.
Tire chains can reduce the directional
stability of the car.
Tire chains must not be used on the
rear wheels.
NOTICE
Check the links frequently for wear.
Check that the chains do not contact
the wheel-arch liner at full lock.
See section ”Specifications”,
page 260, for information on allowable
wheel dimensions for the fitting of tire
chains.
161Starting and driving
2 Wait until the needle has dropped back
to indicate normal temperature (roughly
midway, in the white zone) before stop-
ping the engine. If the coolant needs top-
ping up, unscrew the cap on expansion
tank
carefully
.
Top up, as necessary, ideally with a
50/50 mixture of Saab-approved coolant
and water. If only water is available, use
that, but remember to have the coolant
mixture checked as soon as possible.
3 As soon as possible, have the cooling
system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
Towing a trailer
Trailer hitch attachment
Trailer hitch attachments are available as
accessories. These are designed for a max-
imum trailer weight of 3500 lbs. (1588 kg),
see also page 253.
Use only the electrical trailer hitch socket
provided in the trailer hitch kit.
Saab recommends:
Use a Saab original hitch kit attachment
which is designed and tested by Saab.
Consult your Saab dealer regarding the
appropriate hitch kit for your car.
WARNING
Exercise care when opening the hood
if the engine is overheated. Never
remove the expansion tank cap com-
pletely when the engine is hot.
The cooling system is pressurized -
hot coolant and vapor can escape.
These can cause injury to your eyes
and burns. Open the cap slowly to
release the pressure before
removing it.
WARNING
When towing a trailer, do not attempt
to negotiate a hill having a gradient in
excess of 15 %. The weight distribu-
tion over the front wheels of the car will
be insufficient to prevent wheelspin,
making further progress impossible.
In addition, the parking brake may not
always be able to hold the car and trai-
ler securely, with the result that the
wheels can start to slide downhill.
Always apply the trailer’s handbrake
when unhitching it. There is otherwise
a risk of personal injury or damage to
the bumper should the trailer start to
roll.
NOTICE
Use only a genuine Saab trailer hitch and
wiring, since other wiring methods can
cause expensive damage to the car’s
body and electrical system.
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for
guidance on how to connect the trailer
hitch electrical system.
162 Starting and driving
Trailer weight
Maximum recommended trailer weights for
different gradients, with a view to comfort
and drivability for manual and automatic
cars, are shown on the drawing.
Make sure you are familiar with the law
regarding speed limits for towing, maxi-
mum trailer weights, trailer-braking
requirements, and also any special
driving-licence provisions
(see also page 253
).
The specified trailer weights and gradients
assume that the journey starts at the hill and
therefore apply only to short periods.
Recommendations for driving in hilly
terrain
The following time limits are based on the
capacity of the cooling system in warm
weather, i.e. approximately 86
°
F (30
°
C).
The following time limits are based on the
capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 104
°
F (40
°
C).
Gradient
of hill, %
Maximum
trailer weight,
lbs. (kg)
Maximum dura-
tion, minutes
6–7 3300 (1500) unlimited
8–9 3300 (1500) 15 max
10–15 1870 (850) 15 max
Gradient
of hill, %
Maximum
trailer weight,
lbs. (kg)
Maximum dura-
tion, minutes
6–7 2000 (900) unlimited
8–9 2000 (900) 15 max
10–15 1000 (450) 15 max.
Maximum recommended trailer weights
for different gradients
163Starting and driving
When negotiating long hills, bear the follo-
wing important considerations in mind:
Use Normal mode when driving with a
caravan or trailer on hilly roads. The adap-
tive gear change pattern function will pre-
vent the transmission overheating.
Rises in coolant temperature are indica-
ted by the temperature gauge in the main
instrument panel.
Recommendations for cars with
automatic transmission
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperature gauge in the main instru-
ment panel.
The following steps are taken in order as the
temperature of the engine increases:
Gear change pattern is altered.
A/C compressor is switched off.
Engine torque is reduced.
The following message will be displayed on
the SID if the transmission fluid becomes
too hot:
“Gearbox too hot.
Make a safe stop.
If this message appears, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
engine to idle until the message has gone
out. The selector lever should be in
position P.
When continuing your journey, select
manual mode and a gear in which the
engine speed is about 3,000 rpm until the
incline eases (see page 149).
WARNING
Remember to use the braking effect of the
engine (position D or L) when you are
descending long or steep hills to spare
the brakes.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!
164 Starting and driving
Recommendations for cars with manual
gearbox
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperature gauge in the main instru-
ment panel.
The following steps are taken in order as the
temperature of the engine increases:
A/C compressor is switched off.
engine torque is reduced.
When continuing your journey, select a gear
in which the engine speed is about
3,000 rpm until the incline eases.
Driving considerations
Always take extra care when towing a
trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
and its braking effect reduced. The trailer’s
braking system and suspension also have a
considerable effect on these characteris-
tics, see also ”Driving with a load” page 168.
If the car has automatic transmission, select
position D when ascending steep hills. This
ensures that the adaptive gear change pat-
terns are operational, see page 150. Use
position D or L for steep descents.
Checks before driving
Make sure that the car and camper or trailer
are in good working order. This is essential
since towing a camper or trailer increases
the strain on the car.
Check and if necessary adjust the tire
pressure of the car and camper or trailer.
Make sure all wheel bolts are properly
tightened.
Make sure that the equipment joining the
car and camper or trailer is properly secu-
red and adjusted.
Make sure the camper or trailer’s electri-
cal cable is properly connected and is not
so long that it drags along the ground.
Also, make sure the cable is not too short
and risks breaking when turning a corner.
Check all bulbs.
Check the car and camper or trailer bra-
kes.
Make sure that all items on or in the cara-
van or trailer are properly secured.
Make sure that the camper or trailer’s
jockey wheel is raised and locked.
Check the distribution of the load so that
the car and camper or trailer are well
balanced.
Check that the rearview mirrors provide
the best possible rearward vision.
Make sure the camper or trailer’s safety
cable is correctly attached.
WARNING
Utilize the braking effect of the engine
(1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you are
descending long or steep hills to spare
the brakes.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!
NOTICE
If the ”Automatic transmission, fault indi-
cator” indicator comes on, cease
towing until the problem has been recti-
fied.
165Starting and driving
Trailer hitch load
The weight distribution on the trailer makes
a lot of difference to the handling properties
of the car and trailer combination. As
regards single-axle trailers, whenever pos-
sible, concentrate the load over the wheels
and keep it as low as possible.
The trailer should be loaded so that the
maximum load on the towbar ball is 5 % to
7 % of the trailer weight with a maximum
permissible tongue weight of 110–165 lbs.
(50–75 kg).
Note that this load must be added to the total
load for the car. If this now exceeds the
specified load capacity, the load in the lug-
gage compartment will have to be reduced
by a corresponding amount.
WARNING
When you connect the trailer be sure to
attach its safety chains to the holes as
illustrated.
IB106
Distribution of load in trailer
aLight
b Moderate
cHeavy
Attach the safety chains to the holes as
illustrated.
166 Starting and driving
Driving with a roof rack
load
The maximum permissible roof load is
220 lbs. (100 kg).
Note that the roof load is included in the
car’s maximum permissible load (see
page 252).
Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-
cially for the car are available from your
Saab dealer. Always secure the roof load
safely.
Fitting the roof carriers,
9-5 Sedan and 9-5 Wagon
without roof rails
(accessory)
The carrier feet are marked with a top view
of the car and arrow indicating their posi-
tions.
1 Slip the plastic cover onto the adjustable
foot of the carrier (foot with knob for tigh-
tening) to protect the paintwork during
assembly.
2 Open all the doors.
Fold back the rubber strip and find the
fixing holes.
3 Start on the left-hand side of the car.
Rest the carrier carefully across the roof,
with the rigid foot towards you. Hold the
foot clear of the roof to avoid damaging
the paintwork.
Fold back the rubber strip and insert the
pins on the foot into the fixing holes.
Make sure that the rubber strip comes
inside the plastic cover on the carrier.
Repeat the procedure with the other
carrier.
WARNING
A roof load will affect the car’s center
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
aware of this when cornering and dri-
ving in crosswinds.
Suit your speed to the prevailing con-
ditions.
Due to higher aerodynamic drag, fuel
economy may suffer when driving with
a roof rack.
IB480
IB481
167Starting and driving
4 Close the doors on the left-hand side of
the car gently, to hold the carrier feet in
place.
5 Now go around to the other side of the
car and remove the plastic cover from
the carrier’s adjustable foot. Fold back
the rubber strip and insert the pins on
the foot into the fixing holes. Do the
same with the other carrier and close the
doors gently.
6 Tighten each carrier by turning the knob
clockwise (by hand). Tighten just
enough to bring the foot up against the
edges of the fixing holes.
Remove the carriers when not in use, as
they increase fuel consumption.
The instructions that accompany the carri-
ers also include advice on driving with a roof
load – we strongly recommend that you
read them carefully.
Fitting the roof carriers,
9-5 Wagon with roof rails
(accessory)
1 Clean the car’s roof rails.
2 Check the markings on the cross mem-
bers to see which is the front and which
is the rear roof carrier.
3 Place the cross members on the roof
rails, on their respective sides of the
center supports. The cross members
must not be placed beyond the front or
rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the dis-
tance between the cross members is at
least 28 inches (700 mm).
If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross
members must be positioned so that the
tailgate can be opened fully without hit-
ting the roof box.
4 Using your thumb, press the bracket so
that it lies snugly against the outside of
the roof rail. Make sure that the roof car-
riers are seated centrally on the rubber
spacers and that these sit correctly on
the roof rail. Pull the spacers down
slightly on the inside of the roof rail.
5 Center the roof carriers so that they
protrude equally on both sides.
6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.
Ensure that the tightening knobs are
upright once the roof carriers have been
tightened.
7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely
in place.
IB1294
168 Starting and driving
Driving at night
Bear in mind the following points when
driving at night:
Nighttime driving requires your full con-
centration.
Do not rush. Count on your journey taking
slightly longer.
The number of drivers under the influence
of drugs is likely to be greater at night than
during the day.
Do not stare at the headlights of onco-
ming vehicles.
Avoid driving at night if you have poor eye-
sight. Night vision deteriorates with age.
Keep your car's headlights, windows and
mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,
make sure they are clean.
Make sure you are well rested before star-
ting a long journey. Take a break every
other hour.
Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a
tendency to induce tiredness.
Driving with a load
The driving characteristics of the car are
affected by the way it is loaded.
Place heavy loads as far forward and as
low as possible in the trunk.
Secure the load to the tie downs, see
page 123.
The load should be such that the car´s
total weight or axle weight are not
exceeded, see page 252.
Heavy loads mean that the car’s center of
gravity is further back. As a result, the car
will sway more during evasive steering.
Never exceed the permissible load in the
roof box, even if there is room for more.
Ensure that the tire pressure is correct –
slight overinflation is preferable to under-
inflation.
The braking distance of a loaded car is
always greater. Keep your distance from
the vehicle in front.
Roof loads can negatively affect tele-
communication.
Tire pressure, see page 262 and back
cover.
IB1295
169Starting and driving
Tires
The tire pressure should match the current
load and speed of the car; for cars sold in
U.S. see page 226; for cars sold in Canada
see page 261.
The tire pressures given apply to
cold
tires,
that is tires that are the same temperature
as the outside air temperature.
The tire pressure increases as the tires
become warm (e.g. during highway driving)
with approximately 0.3 bar (4 psi). When
the temperature of the tires changes by 50°
(10°C), the tire pressure will change 0.1 bar
(2 psi).
Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Underinflated tires wear more quickly than
slightly overinflated tires.
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit
a new one.
Important!
Remember to adjust the tire
pressures if you change the load in the car
or intend to drive at substantially lower or
higher speeds than normal.
WARNING
Check the tire pressure
at least once a
month
and before long journeys. Under-
inflation can result in:
Punctures
Separation of the tire and tread
Damage to the sidewalls
Damage to the rims on poor roads
Poor handling characteristics
Premature tire wear
Increased fuel consumption.
170 Starting and driving
Spare wheel and tools
The spare wheel, together with the jack and
jack handle, front towrope attachment eye
and toolkit, are stowed away underneath
the trunk.
Driving considerations
with compact spare
wheel/tire fitted
The following should be observed when the
compact spare wheel (T115/70 R16) is
fitted:
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the wheel.
Do not drive further than necessary with
the compact spare fitted – the maximum
life of the wheel is only just over
2000 miles (3,500 km).
Refit the standard tire as soon as pos-
sible.
Important considerations when driving with
a compact spare tire:
The car’s ground clearance is reduced.
The car must not be driven with more than
one compact tire at a time.
Avoid driving against a curb.
Do not use snow chains.
Do not fit the wheel cover - this would con-
ceal the warning text.
WARNING
Stow all tools carefully away after use, so
that they cannot get loose and cause
injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) as
the tire can overheat and adversely
affect the handling of the car.
Tire pressure: refer to page 261.
The spare wheel or punctured tire
must be stowed under the trunk floor,
and secured in place with the retaining
nut.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy
wheel it can be placed outside up in the
spare-wheel well but
only
while driving to
the closest workshop.
A general rule is that all heavy loads must
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment, see page 123 and 126.
IB3232
171Starting and driving
Driving with the trunk
lid/tailgate open
Avoid driving with the trunk lid/tailgate partly
or fully open, since exhaust fumes can be
drawn into the cabin.
If you must drive with the trunk lid/tailgate
open, all windows and the sunroof (if fitted)
must be closed and the cabin fan on at its
highest speed setting.
Driving in deep water Towing the car
NOTICE
Do not drive in water deeper than
12 inches (30 cm) and do not drive faster
than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be
sucked into the engine. The engine will be
seriously damaged if water enters the
intake system.
WARNING
Remember that the brake servo does
not operate when the engine is off.
Much greater pressure than normal
will therefore be required to operate
the brake pedal.
Nor does the steering servo operate
when the engine is off. The steering
will therefore be much heavier than
usual.
The towing vehicle should always be
heavier than the vehicle on tow.
Never allow passengers to ride in the
car being towed.
Always seek professional help if the
car needs to be towed.
172 Starting and driving
Front towing eye
The front towing eye is stored with the spare
wheel.
The attachment point (tapped hole) for the
towing eye is midway along the engine sub-
frame at the front of the car.
Remove the plastic plug and screw in the
towing eye securely.
To ensure that the towing eye is in far
enough, insert the handle of the wheel
wrench through the eye for additional
leverage.
Rear towing eye
The car has a permanently mounted towing
eye at the back. If the car is equipped with a
trailer hitch, this can be used instead of the
towing eye.
WARNING
Make sure that the towing eye at the
front is screwed in tightly.
The towing eye is only designed for
use when the car is being towed on the
road. It
must not be used
to pull the
car out of a ditch, for example.
Make sure that all bystanders keep a
suitable distance, in case the towing
eye or tow rope should break. The
towing eye or tow rope could catapult
off and cause serious injury.
NOTICE
Do not drive the car with the front
towing eye in position. If it catches the
curb, for example, the engine sub-
frame could be damaged.
Refit the plastic plug in the hole when
the towing eye has been removed, to
keep dirt and moisture out of the
threads.
IB2427
Front towing eye
IB483
Rear towing eye
173Starting and driving
Towing the car
Gear lever in neutral (in cars with automatic
transmission: selector lever at N (neutral))
Turn on the parking lights.
Drive carefully and do not exceed the
speed limit for vehicles being towed.
Always try to keep the towrope taut by
gently applying the brake, as necessary.
This will avoid the towrope being jerked
violently.
The local regulations on towing speeds
must be followed.
The highest permissible towing speed is
30 mph (50 km/h), unless the legal limit is
lower. The longest permissible towing dis-
tance is 30 miles (50 km). If the car has to
be transported farther than that, summon a
tow truck. A flat bed tow truck is the pre-
ferred method to tow.
Failure to follow these guidelines can result
in damage.
Cars with automatic transmission
The car cannot be push started. In an emer-
gency, it is possible to start the engine using
jump leads (see the section, ”Jump starting”
on page 174).
Transporting the car
NOTICE
Never
use the towing eyes to pull the
car unstuck.
NOTICE
The car must be towed front first.
If the car is to be towed with the front
wheels off the ground, make sure the
parking brake is off, as this acts on the
rear wheels.
NOTICE
If a car with a sport (lowered) chassis is
transported, for example on a flat bed
truck, take extra care not to damage the
spoiler and/or underbody.
Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
unstuck
174 Starting and driving
Jump starting
If your battery has run down, you may want
to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your Saab. Follow the steps
below to do it safely.
To jump start your vehicle:
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground
system.
2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
vehicles are not touching each other. If a
poor connection on the negative jumper
cable should exist, it is possible for
damage to be caused to electrical sys-
tems/components of either vehicle
should inadvertent contact be made.
You would not be able to start your car
and bad grounding could damage elec-
trical systems.
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Turn off all lights that are not needed,
and radios. This will avoid sparks and
help save both batteries and it could
save your radio.
WARNING
When working on the battery, highly
explosive gas can build up. A spark
could ignite this gas that collects
around the battery.
Therefore, always avoid sparks and
open flames in the vicinity of the bat-
tery.
The battery contains corrosive sulfuric
acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
the affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash your hands after
handling.
NOTICE
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be
covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your car by pushing or pul-
ling it could damage your vehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. If you
have an automatic transmission, your
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
pulling it.
NOTICE
If the other system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged.
WARNING
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
Set the parking brake firmly on each
vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in
P (Park) or a manual transmission in
Neutral.
+
+
IB484
175Starting and driving
4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
Find the positive (+) and negative (–) termi-
nals on the battery.
5 Check that the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation. If they
do, you could get a shock and also the
vehicles could be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (–) will go to a major metal
engine part with a good ground. Do not
connect (+) to (–) or you will get a short
that could injure you or would damage
the battery and maybe other parts as
well.
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
the good battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8 Now connect the black negative (–)
cable to the good battery’s negative
terminal.
NOTICE
If you leave your radio on, it could be
badly damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
WARNING
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
WARNING
Using a match or flame of any kind near a
battery can cause battery gas to explode.
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
The battery installed in your new Saab
has filler caps. Be sure the right amount
of water is there. Add distilled or boiled
water if the level is too low. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
When connecting jumper cables to a
frozen battery, gas from the chemical
reaction inside the battery can build up
under the ice and cause an explosion.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-
tally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
flush the area with water and get medical
help immediately.
176 Starting and driving
9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from the discharged bat-
tery, but not near engine parts that
move. To avoid an arc which could deto-
nate the hydrogen gas around the bat-
tery, the final connection must be at least
18” from the battery.
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11 Try to start the vehicle with the dischar-
ged battery. If it does not start after a few
tries, it probably needs service.
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
prevent electrical shorting. Take care
that they do not touch each other or any
other metal.
Charging the battery/Jump
starting
To avoid damaging the car’s electrical
system and electronics, the following rules
must be followed when charging the battery
or jump starting the car.
If the charger or starter unit can be set to
different voltages (6V/12V/18V/24V), 12V
must be selected.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
supplied with the charger or starter unit.
Nothing that is plugged into an electrical
outlet should be connected to the car
during charging or jump starting.
The charger or starter unit must under no
conditions produce a voltage greater
than:
16V continuous
18V for 60 min.
If you are unsure about the charge rating
of the unit, disconnect the battery clamp
from the positive terminal before connec-
ting the unit to the battery.
WARNING
Do not let the other end touch anything
until the next step. The other end of the
negative cable
does not
go to the dead
battery. It goes to a major metal part with
a good ground on the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
177Starting and driving
Saab Parking
Assistance
(if equipped)
The parking aid system facilitates parking
and reversing. There are four sensors in
the rear bumper that detect objects up to
6 feet (1.8 metres) behind the car.
The system uses four sensors in the rear
bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that
bounce back to the sensors off any objects
behind the car. The system, however,
cannot always detect small or narrow
objects or objects that do not reflect ultra-
sound back towards the car, such as pipes,
or the corner of a house or rectangular post.
The system is activated automatically when
reverse is engaged or selected. When the
sensors detect an object within the monito-
red area, the SID will display the text "PARK
ASSIST" and pulses of sound (-----) will
be heard. The frequency of the pulses
increases as the car comes closer to the
object.
When the distance to the object is less
than 12 in. (30 cm), a continuous tone
will be heard.
WARNING
Responsibility
always
lies with the driver
when reversing.
Saab Parking Assistance can facilitate
reversing at low speeds, such as when
reverse parking.
Bear in mind that small and/or narrow
objects cannot always be detected by
the system.
IB1299
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
the side
IB1300
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
above
178 Starting and driving
When an object is approximately 3 feet
(90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses
change character markedly. A distance of
about 3 feet (90 cm) is suitable if you wish
to load or unload the luggage compartment.
If the distance between an object and the
corner sensors does not change for three
seconds, e.g. if you are reversing alongside
a wall, the system will switch to monitoring
straight back. The system indicates if the
distance to the wall decreases again.
The system can be disengaged for when
driving with a trailer. Press and hold the
CLEAR button on the SID when the display
shows "PARK ASSIST", until the display
shows "PARK ASSIST OFF". The system is
re-engaged in the same way. The system is
also always activated when the ignition key
is turned to ON.
Pressing a SID button briefly will not disen-
gage the system, the display will simply
show the previously selected function.
Ice, snow and dirt can affect the sensitivity
of the sensors. In such cases a continuous
tone will sound warning the driver that the
system cannot measure the distance to an
object. You can turn the system off by press-
ing and holding the CLEAR button for
1.5 seconds.
If the text "PARK ASSIST FAILURE" is dis-
played on the SID, have the system
checked by an authorized Saab dealer.
NOTICE
Reverse slowly so that you have time to
stop the car when the continuous tone is
heard at approx. 12 in. (30 cm).
NOTICE
To function well, the sensors must be kept
clean. Ice snow and dirt can affect their
sensitivity.
Do not spray the sensors or closer than
8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with a pres-
sure washer, as this could damage them.
179Starting and driving
Parking brake
The parking brake is situated between the
front seats and acts on the rear wheels.
When the parking brake is on, the indicator
light on the main instrument panel will
be on. To release the parking brake, lift the
lever slightly, press the release button and
release the lever by pushing down on it.
Parking
WARNING
Always
apply the parking brake when
you park the car.
Always
apply the parking brake
before removing the ignition key.
Do not use the parking brake while
driving.
WARNING
Do not leave children or pets unatten-
ded in the car. In warm, sunny
weather, the temperature inside the
car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).
Park where the vehicle will not create
an obstruction or a hazard to other
road users.
Do not park on dry grass or other com-
bustible material. The catalytic con-
verter gets very hot and could start a
fire.
Apply the parking brake.
Shift to Reverse for manual transmis-
sion (automatic transmission: move
selector lever to P (Park)), and remove
the ignition key. Lock the car.
NOTICE
Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:
Never leave a mobile phone, camera,
computer or similar object visible in
your car.
Clothing, packages and bags attract
thieves.
Do not leave small objects such as
CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.
If possible, park in a well-lit,
conspicuous parking space.
Thieves strike whenever and where-
ver they are given the opportunity.
IB360
180 Starting and driving
Parking on a hill
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
wheels so that they will be blocked by the
curb if the car should move.
Long-term parking
If the car is not going to be used for some
time, e.g. 3–4 months, the following steps
are recommended:
Run the engine to normal temperature
before long-term parking.
Drain the washer-fluid reservoir and
hoses.
Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
seals on the hood, luggage compartment
lid and doors, and lubricate them with gly-
cerol (glycerin).
After washing the car, dry the brake discs
by taking the car out on the road and app-
lying the brakes a few times.
Fill the fuel tank with fuel to prevent con-
densation forming in it.
Top up the coolant and check the anti-
freeze before the onset of winter.
Park the car in a dry, covered and well-
ventilated building. Leave the parking
brake OFF!
Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.
If frost is likely to occur during the long-
term parking, remove the battery and
store it away from the frost.
Ideally, the car should be put up on blocks,
with the wheels off the ground. If this is not
possible, inflate the tires to about 43 psi
(300 kPa).
Leave all the windows open a crack and
cover the car with a fabric tarpaulin – not
one made of plastic.
123
IB485
1
Pointing downhill and
against the curb
– Turn the wheels into
the curb and edge the
car forward until the
wheels touch the curb.
2
Pointing uphill and
against the curb
– Turn the wheels away
from the curb and edge
the car back until the
wheels touch the curb.
3
Pointing uphill or
downhill – no curb
– Turn the wheels
towards the edge of the
road. If the car should
start rolling, it will not run
into the road.
181Car care and technical information
IB1772
Hood________________ 182
Engine compartment __ 183
Emission control systems 184
Engine ______________ 186
Engine oil____________ 186
Transmission fluid ____ 188
Coolant______________ 188
Brake and clutch fluid__ 189
Power steering fluid ___ 191
Air filter _____________ 191
Battery ______________ 192
Drive belts ___________ 194
Wipers and washers ___ 195
Changing bulbs_______ 197
Fuses _______________ 211
Tires _________________ 217
Compact spare tire _____ 230
Air conditioning (ACC)__ 234
Safety belts ___________ 235
Upholstery and trim ____ 236
Textile carpeting _______ 236
Washing the car _______ 237
Waxing and polishing___ 238
Engine compartment ___ 238
Touching up the paint __ 238
Anti-corrosion treatment 240
For long trips__________ 241
Recovery and/or recycling
of automotive materials 242
Headlight aiming_______ 242
Car care and technical information
182 Car care and technical information
Hood
The hood release handle is located under-
neath the instrument panel. To open the
hood:
1 Pull the release handle.
2 The front of the hood will now spring up,
providing access to the secondary
safety catch.
3 Push the catch upwards, pushing the
hood downward a little bit at the same
time. The hood can now be lifted right
up.
To close the hood, release it from a height
of about 8 in (20 cm).
Do not
press down
on it.
In cold weather, when the mechanism is
stiff, the hood might need to be released
from twice the height to lock properly.
Check that the hood is now closed securely.
WARNING
Never hold your fingers between the hood
and safety catch if lowering but not clos-
ing the hood.
IB487
IB486
Hood release handle Hood secondary safety catch
183Car care and technical information
Engine compartment
9 68
1 2 43
57
IB3637
Engine compartment
1 Engine-oil dipstick/filler cap
2 Reservoir, brake/clutch fluid
3 Fuse box
4 Expansion tank, coolant
5 Washer-fluid filler cap
6Battery
7 Turbo unit
8 Ignition discharge module
9 Reservoir, power-steering fluid
184 Car care and technical information
Engine families
Saab cars imported into the United States
and Canada meet all applicable emission
control standards. The engine family and
appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-
tified on a label affixed to the left front inner
fender.
These engine families meet applicable EPA
Federal Standards, California State Stan-
dards and Canadian Federal Standards and
are equipped with the following systems:
Sequential multiport fuel injection system
Three way catalytic converter
Crankcase emissions control system
Evaporative emission control system
On-Board diagnostic (OBD II) system.
Emission control
systems
The systems for controlling emissions to the
atmosphere require regular checking and
adjustment at the intervals specified in the
service program.
In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
regulations and thereby helping to keep the
environment clean, a correctly tuned engine
will also give maximum fuel economy.
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
CA to cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
185Car care and technical information
Saab Trionic engine
management system
The Saab Trionic engine management
system is a unique Saab development that
combines sequential multiport fuel injection,
electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-
charger boost pressure control into one sys-
tem.
The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
monitors many different engine parameters
such as:
Intake manifold pressure
Intake air temperature
Crankshaft position
Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position and
The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
The ECM receives information regarding
engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-
back function in the ignition discharge unit.
By processing all of this information, the Tri-
onic system can control fuel injector ope-
ning duration, ignition timing and turbochar-
ger boost pressure to provide excellent
engine performance while maintaining low
emissions and fuel consumption.
ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
Hydrocarbon vapors formed when refueling
will be recovered by the car and not rele-
ased into the atmosphere. The hydrocar-
bons are absorbed in a evaporative emis-
sion canister. When the engine is
subsequently started, the evaporative emis-
sion canister is gradually purged as air is
sucked into it through a shut-off valve. The
hydrocarbon/air mixture passes through the
evap canister purge valve and into the
engine where it is burned.
When refueling, make sure you screw the
filler cap on and keep turning until it has
clicked at least 3 times. Otherwise, it is pos-
sible for the CHECK ENGINE light to illumi-
nate.
Refueling, see page 138.
NOTICE
The Trionic engine management system
continuously monitors the operation of
these systems and has on-board diag-
nostic capabilities (OBD II).
If the ”Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE)” lamp in the main instru-
ment illuminates, this indicates that the
Trionic ECM has detected a problem. The
car will continue to operate, but perfor-
mance may be diminished. You should
have your car checked by a Saab dealer
as soon as possible.
186 Car care and technical information
Engine
The 2.3-liter model is a transverse, 4-cylin-
der in-line engine with twin overhead cams-
hafts and 4 valves per cylinder.
This engine is equipped with balance shafts
that reduce engine vibration to a minimum.
The balance shafts are chain driven and
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
They produce forces and torques that are
opposed to those generated by the pistons
and connecting rods, an effect that occurs
twice for each revolution of the engine.
Engine noise is also reduced as the coun-
ter-rotating shafts counteract the vibration
from the moving parts of the engine.
The transmission, located on the right (vie-
wed from the front), is integrated with the
engine. All models have front-wheel drive.
Engine oil
Checking the oil level
Check the engine-oil level regularly. This
should be done after the engine has been
run to normal temperature and then allowed
to cool for 2–5 minutes, with the car stan-
ding on level ground. Remove the dipstick
and wipe it clean before checking the level.
The oil level must not be allowed to drop
below the MIN mark on the dipstick, nor
should oil be filled beyond the MAX mark, as
this can lead to excessive oil consumption.
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a
volume of approximately 1.05 qts (1 liter).
When necessary, add oil of the recommen-
ded grade via the dipstick tube.
IB601
Balance shafts
187Car care and technical information
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed in accor-
dance with the service program, see
page 246.
Oil volume and grade, see page 255.
Oil changing should be carried out on a
warm engine.
1 Unscrew the drain plug in the bottom of
the sump and leave the oil to drain into
an oil tray or other suitable receptacle for
at least ten minutes. Take care, as the oil
may be hot.
2 After the oil has been drained, unscrew
and remove the oil filter.
3 Fit a new filter and tighten it by hand.
4 Refit the drain plug with a new washer.
5 Fill with new engine oil.
Run the engine to normal temperature and
check the oil level.
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be
required more frequently, see page 246.
WARNING
Prolonged and repeated exposure of
the skin to engine oil can cause seri-
ous skin disorders. Avoid prolonged
skin contact whenever possible.
Used engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by
washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Keep oil out of reach of children.
Do not touch the turbocharger or
exhaust manifold. These get very hot
when the engine has been running.
Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
engine as this could cause a fire. Used
engine oil is particularly flammable.
Protect the environment. Do not
dispose of oil in the ground or down a
drain. Dispose of all used oil and oil
filters at an appropriate disposal facil-
ity.
IB491
Engine-oil filler cap and dipstick
IB493
Drain plug and oil filter
188 Car care and technical information
Transmission fluid
Manual transmission
Check and top up the fluid in accordance
with the service program.
Automatic transmission
Check and top up the fluid in accordance
with the service program.
Coolant
The expansion tank is transparent to facili-
tate checking of the coolant level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant must
not lie over the KALT/COLD mark on the
expansion tank.
If the message
”Coolant level low.
Refill.”
is displayed on the SID, check the level of
fluid in the expansion tank.
Top up, as necessary, with equal parts of
clean water and Saab-approved coolant.
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
is added, run the engine to normal tempera-
ture and top up again, as necessary.
WARNING
Proceed with caution if the radiator is
boiling when you open the hood.
Never remove the expansion-tank
filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
The cooling system is pressurized –
hot coolant and vapor can escape
when the filler cap is released. These
can cause injury to your eyes and
burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and
let the engine cool before removing
the cap.
Exercise care when adding coolant.
Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a
fire risk.
IB1338
Coolant expansion tank
189Car care and technical information
The cooling system is charged at the factory
with coolant containing a 45 % concentra-
tion of a combined antifreeze and corrosion
inhibitor. A weaker mixture will result in
reduced anticorrosion protection. For pro-
tection against freezing in very cold
weather, a stronger concentration will be
needed.
A 60 % concentration of antifreeze will pro-
vide protection at temperatures down to -
58 F (–50°C).
The coolant does not normally have to be
changed during the service life of the car.
The type of coolant used has a reddish color
and should not be mixed with other types of
coolant. Saab Original coolant should be
used all year round. Only use coolant appro-
ved by Saab.
Note:
If incorrect coolant is used or added, the life-
time properties will be affected. Even if the
coolant is flushed from the system and
replaced with life-time coolant, life-time pro-
perties are no longer retained and the coo-
lant must then be drained and replaced at
regular intervals.
Brake and clutch fluid
Checking the fluid level
The combined brake and clutch-fluid reser-
voir is transparent to facilitate checking of
the fluid level.
The level should be between the MAX and
MIN marks. Top up, as necessary, with
DOT 4
fluid. Do
not
use DOT 5 brake fluid.
NOTICE
Always mix the antifreeze with the
appropriate volume of water before
adding it to the cooling system.
If pure antifreeze is added, the engine
could still freeze and be damaged. This is
because the antifreeze will not mix
properly with the coolant before the
thermostat has opened to allow full
circulation.
WARNING
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
water from the air and, in time, could allow
vapor to form in the brake system, thus
reducing its performance. It is therefore
important that brake fluid be changed
regularly, as specified in the service
program.
190 Car care and technical information
Use only new brake fluid from a sealed con-
tainer.
Check that there are no leaks in the brake
system.
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
reservoir corresponds to the amount of
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
necessary.
Changing of the brake fluid should be
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
The vehicle´s regular braking system is
adjusted automatically, but the parking
brake has to be adjusted manually. This
work, involving adjustment of the parking
brake cables and brake pads, must only be
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
It is not possible to detect, through abnormal
pedal or parking brake-lever travel, whether
brake pads are worn and need replacing. It
is therefore essential that brake pads be
checked regularly, as specified in the ser-
vice program.
Brake pad wear indicators
The outboard brake pads on the front
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
When the lining is down to 0.11 in (3 mm),
the pad will produce a screeching, squeal-
ing or scraping noise when the brakes are
applied. New pads should be fitted without
delay.
Brake pads should only be changed by
an authorized Saab dealer. To ensure
optimum brake performance, use only
Saab original brake pads.
NOTICE
Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
since it can cause the paint to bubble and
lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
should be flushed with large quantities of
water as quickly as possible.
IB1188
Brake and clutch-fluid reservoir
191Car care and technical information
Power steering fluid
Check the level of the power steering fluid in
the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
the service program.
The wheels should point forward during the
check.
Clean around the cap before it is unscre-
wed. Clean the dipstick. Screw in the cap
completely again before checking the level.
The oil should lie between the MAX and MIN
marks when the oil temperature is about
70°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder the level can
be lower, and in higher temperatures the
level can be higher, both of which are
acceptable.
Top up with ”Power Steering Fluid
CHF 11S”.
Air filter
WARNING
Do not fill the power steering fluid to
above the MAX mark. Too much fluid
can result in leakage.
Power steering fluid on hot engine
components constitutes a fire risk.
WARNING
For Service and Repair, parts equiva-
lent to those used by Saab should be
used.
Be aware that some non standard
replacement parts may put you in an
unsafe condition, even if they might fit.
IB501
Power steering fluid reservoir
192 Car care and technical information
Battery
The battery is provided with a cover to pro-
tect it from radiated heat. If the battery is
exposed to high temperatures, its life will be
shortened. To remove the cover, release
the two clips along its long sides.
The cover fits the standard battery installed
in the car. If a new battery is to be fitted,
make sure that its dimensions are the same
as the standard one.
The battery is maintenance free and should
be changed if the electrolyte level is too low.
The indicator on the top side of the battery
will be white if the battery needs replacing.
The fluid level and the charge level should
be checked regularly.
If frequent short journeys are made, the bat-
tery may need to be given a booster charge.
This can be done either using a battery
charger or by taking the car for a long run.
A car with a standard equipment specifica-
tion and a fully charged battery can be left
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-
ted, such as a car phone, the charge may
only be sufficient for about 15 days.
WARNING
Work on the battery may entail an
explosion hazard, since the battery
gives off hydrogen which forms an
explosive mixture with the oxygen in
the air.
For this reason, always avoid sparks
or open flames when working near the
battery.
The battery contains corrosive sulfuric
acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes the skin or clothing, wash the
affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash your hands after
handling.
NOTICE
A discharged battery can freeze and frac-
ture. Batteries should therefore always be
stored away from frost.
IB3129
Electrolyte level indicator.
Level correct if level indicator dark.
Battery should be changed if indicator is
light
193Car care and technical information
Charging/replacing the battery
Connect the positive lead to the positive (+)
battery terminal (red), and the negative lead
to a good ground point, e.g. the lifting lug at
the front of the engine.
To remove the battery, always disconnect
the negative (black) lead first and reconnect
it last when fitting the new battery.
The battery size must comply with DIN
53735 MFI 230/2.16.
NOTICE
To avert the danger of short-circuiting
between the positive (+) terminal on the
battery and the inlet manifold on the
engine, always disconnect the negative
(–) battery lead first and reconnect it last.
NOTICE
If boost charging never use anything
but a 12-volt charger, see page 176.
Never reverse the polarity of the
battery by connecting the leads to the
wrong terminals. The red, positive
lead connects to the positive (+) termi-
nal, and the black, negative lead to the
negative (–) terminal.
Serious damage can occur to the car´s
electrical system if a battery or alterna-
tor lead is disconnected while the
engine is running.
The nut on the battery clamp should
be tightened to a torque of 10 Nm.
IB3131
Correct position for battery clamp
IB3130
Battery
194 Car care and technical information
Drive belts
The alternator is situated on the right-hand
side of the engine, adjacent to the bulkhead.
It is driven via a Poly-V-belt from the
crankshaft pulley.
The Poly-V-belt also drives the water pump,
the A/C compressor and the steering servo
pump.
The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
automatically by the belt tensioner.
See also page 53, ”Warning, charging”.
WARNING
Keep hands and clothing clear of drive
belts when engine is running.
Always stop the engine before
inspecting drive belt.
The radiator fan is electric and can
start
even
when the engine is
switched off.
NOTICE
Serious damage can be done to the car’s
electrical system if an alternator lead is
disconnected while the engine is running.
IB929
Routing of the drive belt
195Car care and technical information
Wipers and washers
Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
If poor wiper performance is experienced,
clean the windshield with a quality glass cle-
aner. This is particularly important if the car
has been through an automatic car wash, as
these sometimes leave a wax coating on the
windshield.
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
fit new blades.
Changing the windshield wiper
blades
Lift the wiper arm off the windshield
1 Depress the catch.
2 Pull the complete blade assembly down
to free it from the wiper arm, and then lift
it off the arm.
Washer jets
The washer jets can be adjusted and, if
necessary, unclogged by means of a pin.
IB506
2
1
IB508
Cleaning/adjusting the washer jets
196 Car care and technical information
Use a small screwdriver to adjust the
washer jet on the rear window wiper of the
9-5 SportWagon, as illustrated.
Washers
The washer-fluid reservoir holds 6.4 quarts
(6 liters). When
"Washer fluid level low.
Refill."
comes up on the SID, the reservoir is down
to about 1 quart (1 liter) of fluid. Add at least
50 % of washer- fluid to water to prevent
freezing and for effective cleaning.
WARNING
Take care not to spill washer fluid
concentrate onto hot surfaces. Washer
fluid concentrate contains flammable
ingredients such as alcohol.
IB1784
Washer-fluid filler cap
IB1783
The headlights have high-pressure
washers (certain variants)
Adjusting the washer jet on the rear
window wiper, 9-5 SportWagon
197Car care and technical information
Changing bulbs
Check that the new bulb is working when finished.
Use only "Long Life" bulbs.
Headlight aiming, see page 242.
Xenon headlight
(if equipped)
Xenon headlights produce roughly twice as much light as halogen
bulbs and have a significantly longer service life.
The lamp units consist of a gas discharge lamp containing xenon.
When the lights are switched on a very high voltage activates the
xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full intensity.
Cars with xenon headlights have automatic levelling. The levelling
system comprises two sensors on the front axle, one on the rear axle
and a control unit under the headlight housing. Headlight alignment
is regulated automatically to prevent dazzling oncoming traffic.
Alignment is also adjusted during braking.
WARNING
Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine to
avoid danger of fingers and hands being injured by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when the engine is switched off.
Xenon headlights are high voltage and must therefore be
changed at an authorized Saab workshop. Work involving
high-voltage components is potentially lethal.
NOTICE
Since the headlight lenses are made of plastic, rinse dried-on
dirt with water and allow it time to soften up before cleaning
the lenses. Avoid rubbing the lenses when dry and never use
solvents.
Use de-icer spray instead of scraping the ice off.
NOTICE
Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W, since the head-
light reflector and the wiring of the car are not designed for a
higher wattage.
Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possi-
ble short-circuiting.
Do not touch the glass of the bulbs with your fingers. The oil
on your skin can shorten the life of the bulb.
198 Car care and technical information
Headlight bulb for high beam (Halogen)
On cars equipped with Xenon lamps the Halogen lamps are used
only for high beam flasher if the daytime running lights are deacti-
vated and the headlight switch is in the off position (otherwise Xenon
lamp is utilized):
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve
accessibility to the right-hand headlight, hold aside the induction
air hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand headlight,
remove the battery cover. Release the two clips along the long
sides of the cover.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.
4 Remove the bulb.
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with
the spring clip. Look through the headlight lens to help fit the bulb
correctly.
7 Plug in the connector.
8 Screw on the cover. Make sure that the guide on the cover is alig-
ned with the recess in the lamp housing.
IB1785
IB1883
Make sure the cover is correctly fitted before locking it in place
199Car care and technical information
Headlight bulb for low beam (Halogen)
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve
accessibility to the right-hand headlight, hold aside the induction
air hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand headlight,
remove the battery cover. Release the two clips along the long
sides of the cover.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.
4 Remove the bulb.
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.
Look through the headlight lens to help fit the bulb correctly.
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with
the spring clip.
7 Plug in the connector.
8 Screw on the cover. Make sure that the guide on the cover is
aligned with the recess in the lamp housing.
IB1786
IB1882
Make sure the cover is correctly fitted before locking it in place
IB1910
Contact an aut-
horized Saab
workshop if a
Xenon head-
light requires
replacement
200 Car care and technical information
Parking-light bulb
(cars with halogen low beam)
The parking-light bulb is adjacent to the bulb
for low beam.
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the
lamp unit.
2 Withdraw the bulb holder.
3 Change the bulb.
Parking-light bulb
(cars with xenon low beam)
The parking-light bulb is next to the bulb for
xenon low beam.
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the
lamp unit.
2 Take hold of the lamp leads and pull out
the bulb holder. The lamp leads are rein-
forced to facilitate changing bulbs.
3 Change the bulb. Look through the
headlight lens to help fit the bulb cor-
rectly.
IB1787
Parking-light bulb (cars with halogen low
beam)
IB1909
Parking-light bulb (cars with xenon low
beam)
201Car care and technical information
Front fog lights
(if equipped)
1 From under the front bumper, grip the
bulb holder and twist counterclockwise.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 Change the bulb.
Refit in the reverse order.
WARNING
Never
crawl under a car that is supported
only by a jack. Always use axle stands.
Refer to the information on jacks on
page 231.
IB1788
Front fog lights Front fog lights, Aero
202 Car care and technical information
Front turn signal and side marker
lights bulbs
To change the bulb, the complete lamp unit
has to be removed.
1 Depress the catch, accessed from the
engine bay.
2 Carefully pull out the lamp unit.
3 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.
Grip the holder and twist it counterclock-
wise.
4 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp
unit.
5 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.
Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
6 Fit the new bulb and check that it is cor-
rectly seated.
To re-install the lamp unit
1 Align the catch with the recess in the
lamp housing holder.
2 Press the lamp housing towards the
headlight slightly and press the housing
towards the rear of the car.
3 Make sure the locating pin and the two
plastic lugs enter their respective holes.
4 Press the lamp housing until it click into
place.
IB1875
Catch seen from engine bay, left-hand
side
IB1790
IB1876
Catch seen from engine bay, right-hand
side
IB1789
2
1
3
3
Front turn signal bulb
1Catch
2 Bayonet pin
3 Plastic lugs
203Car care and technical information
Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan
The bulbs for the lamps in the rear light clus-
ter are accessed from the luggage compart-
ment.
1 Lower the flap (secured with catches).
2 Squeeze the two plastic lugs and
remove the bulb holder.
3 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
4 Change the bulb.
IB516
IB1791
1
2
3
2
3
5
6
4
1
4
IB1792
1
1
2
3
2
6
4
4
52
2
3
Rear light clusters, 9-5 SportWagon
1 Direction indicators
2 Taillights
3 Stop lights and taillights
4 Reversing lights
5 Rear fog light
6 High-mounted brake light
Rear light clusters, 9-5 Sedan
1 Direction indicators
2 Taillights
3 Stop lights and taillights
4 Reversing lights
5 Rear fog light
6 High-mounted brake light
204 Car care and technical information
Trunk lid light and taillights,
9-5 Sedan
Before changing bulbs in the trunk, you
must first release the trim at the foot of the
trunk. This involves removing the handle
and the three trim fasteners (studs).
1 Unscrew the handle on the inside of the
tailgate.
2 Using the peg in the top of the screwdri-
ver handle, push in the button in the
center of the studs.
3 Remove the studs.
Changing bulbs
1 Squeeze together the silver plastic lug
and the electrical connection and with-
draw the lamp holder.
2 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
3 Change the bulb.
Refitting the trim
1 Reset the studs by pushing back the
center buttons so that they protrude by
0.2 inch (5 mm).
2 Insert the studs through the trim and tail-
gate panel. Press the center buttons in,
flush with the collar.
3 Screw the handle back onto the trunk.
IB1877
IB518
205Car care and technical information
High-mounted stop lights,
9-5 Sedan
The bulbs can be accessed after the panel
in the rear headlining has been removed.
1 Remove the panel by carefully pushing
in the two clips, one at the time.
2 Release the bulb holder, which is retai-
ned by a clip at either end.
3 Withdraw the bulb gently straight back.
4 Push in the new bulb.
5 Refit the bulb holder.
6 Replace the panel by carefully pushing
the panel towards the headlining so that
the two clips engage their respective
slot.
32 23
1
IB519
High-mounted stop lights
1 Panel
2 Retaining clips
3 Bulbs
206 Car care and technical information
Rear lights clusters,
9-5 SportWagon
1 Open the tailgate.
2 Remove the cover by turning the two
catches counterclockwise one quarter
turn.
3 Remove the two screws securing the
light cluster to the body.
4 Pull the light cluster rearwards and
angle it outwards (it is seated quite
firmly).
5 Release the fastener from the body.
Reinsert the fastener into the groove in
the light cluster. Press in the fastener
until you hear a click.
6 Take out the bulb holder by twisting it
slightly counterclockwise.
7 Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
8 Change the bulb.
9 Check that the new bulb works.
Reassembly:
1 Align the fastener with the hole in the
body.
2 Press the lamp unit home into the body
until you hear a click.
3 Fit the screws and cover.
IB1793
IB1919
IB1881
207Car care and technical information
Tailgate bulbs, 9-5 SportWagon
1 Turn the lock a quarter turn (90°) with a
screwdriver or the ignition key.
2 Open and remove the cover.
3 Take out the bulb holder by twisting it
slightly counterlockwise.
4 Press in the bulb and twist it
counterclockwise.
5 Change the bulb.
6 Check that the new bulb is working.
Reassembly:
1 Place the two ”hinges” in the recess in
the tailgate.
2 Then push the ”hinges” into the recess
and close the cover.
3 Turn the lock a quarter turn.
IB1227
IB1228
208 Car care and technical information
License-plate light
1 Undo the two screws and remove the
lamp glass.
2 Withdraw the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
4 Check the seal before fitting the glass.
Side direction indicators
1 Slide the lamp fitting forward and pull out
the back.
2 Remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, make sure that the spring in the
lamp fitting engages the edge of the ope-
ning in the body panel.
Courtesy lights (front doors and
floor) and luggage-compartment
lighting
1 Insert a screwdriver carefully into the
slot in the end of the lamp fitting. Ease
the fitting off to gain access to the bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and
remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.
IB521
IB522
IB520
209Car care and technical information
Dome light, front
1 Ease the leading edge of the glass out
of the overhead panel.
2 Release one of the contacts and remove
the bulb.
3 Fit the new bulb.
Dome light, rear
1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
ease out the trailing end first, and then
both front edges.
2 Fit the new bulb.
Glove-compartment illumination
1 Insert a small screwdriver in the slot in
the end of the lamp fitting and ease it out
to gain access to the bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and
remove the bulb.
3 Fit the new bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.
Other bulbs
If any other bulbs need changing, you are
advised to take the car to an authorized
Saab dealer.
IB524
IB525
IB523
210 Car care and technical information
Bulb table
A special kit containing spare bulbs and fuses is available as an
accessory from your Saab dealer. A storage space for this is provi-
ded adjacent to the toolkit and jack, under the panel in the luggage
compartment.
# Cap Wattage
1 H7 55 Headlight
2 H1 55 Fog light
3 P21W 21 Reversing lamp; side reversing lamp; rear
fog lamp; cornering lamp
4 P21/5W 21/5 Stop/tail lamp
5 PY21W 21 Direction indicator, rear
6 R10W 10 Dome light; courtesy lights; glove
compartment; luggage compartment
7 R5W 5 Safety belt reminder
8 Xenon
w9U
6 Reading light, overhead panel
9 T4W 4 Reading light, rear
10 WY5W/
W5W
5 Side indicators (yellow);/ High-mounted
stop light (9-5 Sedan); parking lights;
license plate illumination
11 W2W 1,2 Switches; front ashtray
12 1157NA 32/2.2 cp Direction indicator and side marker light,
front
NOTICE
Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage
could damage the wiring harness and electronics.
211Car care and technical information
Fuses
The fuses are housed in two fuse panels:
one at the end of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side, and one under the hood.
To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
from the panel (see below). If the filament is
broken, the fuse has blown.
A special tool for removing fuses is provided
at the bottom of the fuse panel. Simply push
the tool onto the fuse, squeeze and remove
the fuse.
WARNING
To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or
fire breaking out in the electrical system,
the following advice should be heeded:
Always consult an authorized Saab
dealer before modifying or adding any
electrical equipment. Failure to do so
can result in the electrical system
being damaged.
Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher/lower rating than specified
(see page 213). The color of the fuse
indicates its amperage.
If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
have the electrical system checked by
an authorized Saab dealer.
If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
there is a major fault in the electrical
system. Have the car checked by an
authorized Saab dealer.
IB527
Fuse panel in instrument panel
IB1794
Fuse box under the hood
IB144
Sound fuse / Blown fuse
212 Car care and technical information
Maxi fuses
The Maxi fuses are housed in the fuse box
under the hood. These fuses can be
checked in the same way as the other fuses.
The Maxi fuses are designed to protect the
car’s electrical system from being dama-
ged. Each Maxi fuse protects a number of
electrical circuits and functions and there-
fore has a higher rating (amperage) than the
standard fuses. No spare Maxi fuses are
supplied with the car.
DICE / TWICE
DICE = Dashboard Integrated Central Elec-
tronics
TWICE = Theft-Warning Central Electronics
DICE and TWICE are electronic control
modules that monitor and control a variety
of functions, including:
DICE controls (among other things):
Front lights and interior lighting
Instrument illumination
Intermittent wiper operation
Electric heating of rear window and door
mirrors
Cooling fans
TWICE controls (among other things):
Central locking.
Car alarm (Anti-theft system)
Engine immobilizer
Autochecking of lights.
Electric heating of rear seat
Safety belt reminder
Electrically adjustable passenger seat
The DICE and TWICE control modules are
linked to a data bus, which is basically an
information carrier that allows information to
be exchanged between all the control
modules and components connected to the
bus.
If a fault occurs in any of these components,
diagnostic faults codes are set in the rele-
vant control module, which facilitates fault
diagnosis at the Saab dealer.
The scan tool connector for fault diagnosis
is located under the instrument panel on the
drivers side.
NOTICE
If a Maxi fuse blows, it means that there is
a major fault in the electrical system.
Have the car checked without delay by an
authorized Saab dealer.
IB1795
Maxi fuses under the hood
213Car care and technical information
Fuse panel in instrument panel
# Amp Function
A 30 Trailer lights
B 10 Automatic transmission
C 7.5 Electric door mirrors; DICE: manual beam length
adjustment
115Brake lights
2 15 Reversing lights
3 10 Parking lights and taillights, left
4 10 Parking lights and taillights, right
5 7.5 DICE / TWICE
6 30 Electric windows, right; trailer charging
6B 7.5 Brake lights, trailer
7 10 Engine injectors
8 15 Trunk lighting; trunk lock; door lighting, circulation
pump; parking assistant; SID
9 15 Audio System; CD changer
10 15 Heating, rear seat; sunroof, remote control receiver
11 30 Electrically adjusted passenger seat
12 7.5 Automatic transmission
13 20 Audio System, amplifier
14 30 Ignition system, engine
15 20 Fuel pump
16 20 DICE (direction indicators)
16B OnStar (if equipped)
17 20 Engine-management system; main instrument;
DICE/TWICE
18 40 Door-mirror heating; rear-window heating
19 10 OnStar; Telematics (if equipped)
20 15 ACC; interior lighting; rear fog light; high beam flasher
21 10 Audio System; rear-view mirror; load angle sensor
(cars with xenon); navigation (accessory); Cruise
Control
22 40 Interior fan
23 15 Central locking; navigation (accessory); door mirror
memory
24
25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat
26 7,5 Driver seat memory; mirrors memory; sunroof; par-
king assistant; seatbelt reminder
IB2439
B C 1
2 3 4
5 6
A
14
12
1110
98
7
13
6B
15
16
23 24
222120
1918
17
16B
25 26 27
28 29
30 31
36
3534
33
32
39
38
37
214 Car care and technical information
Relay panel under instrument panel
27 10 Engine-management system; SID; main instrument
28 7.5 Airbag
29 7.5 ABS/ESP
30 7.5 Starter motor
31 7.5 Cruise control; water valve; fog lights, front; rain
sensor
32 15 Ventilated front seats
33 7.5 Direction-indicator switch
34 30 12-volt socket (cigarette lighter) front/rear
35 15 Daytime running light
36 30 Electric windows, left
37 30 Windshield wipers
38 30 Electric heating, front seats
39 20 Limp-home solenoid; OnStar (if equipped)
# Function
A –
B Electric heating of rear seat
C1 –
C2
D–
E Main relay (engine management system)
F–
G Fuel pump
H Ignition switch
I Rear-window / door mirrors heating
IB1796
A
B
C1
C2
L2
L1
D
G
E
F
H
I
K
J
215Car care and technical information
Fuse box under hood
Fuses
J–
KStarter relay
L1 Limp-home function
L2 Trunklid
# Amp Function
1 40 Radiator fan, high speed
2 40 ABS/ESP
3 30 ABS/ESP
4 7.5 Load angle sensor (cars with xenon headlights)
515Heater
6 10 A/C; car alarm siren
715Bulb test
8–
9 20 Headlight washers
4
3
2
IB1797
2
1
14
13
12
7
6
5
1
15 16
8
11
10
9
17
85
1714
11
74
1613
69
10
3
1512
216 Car care and technical information
Relays
10 15 High beam headlight, left
11 15 Low beam headlight left
12 15 High beam headlight, right
13 15 Low beam headlight, right
14 30 Radiator fan, high speed
15 15 Fog lights (front spoiler)
16 30 Wiper, rear
17 15 Horn
18
# Function
1 Bulb test; head light; high beam flasher
2 Headlight washer
3 Front fog lights
4 Wiper, rear (9-5 SportWagon)
5–
6–
7 Rain sensor
8 Radiator fan, low speed
9 Radiator fan, high speed
10 A/C-compressor
11 Radiator fan, high speed, right fan
12 Horn
13 Extra lights (accessory)
14 High beam headlight
15 Low beam headlight
16
17 Windshield wipers
217Car care and technical information
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality
tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If
you ever have questions about your tire
warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Saab Warranty and Service Record
Booklet for details.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label shows
the correct inflation pressures for your tires
when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three
hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6
km).
Notice:
Don’t let anyone tell you that
underinflation or overinflation is all
right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have
enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinfla-
tion), you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
Adjust the tire pressure to match the current
load and speed of the car (see page 261).
The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,
i.e. tires that are the same temperature as
the outside air temperature. Tire pressure
increases as the tires become warm (e.g.
during highway driving) by approximately
0.3 bar (4 psi). When the temperature of the
tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pres-
sure will change 0.1 bar (2 psi).
Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
WARNING
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an blow-out
and a serious accident. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” on page 226.
Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact – such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recom-
mended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
218 Car care and technical information
When to check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It
should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by looking
at them. Radial tires may look properly infla-
ted even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the
valve stems. They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate
your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for
New Tires” on page 219 and “Wheel Repla-
cement” on page 222 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve
more uniform wear for all tires on the
vehicle. The first rotation is the most impor-
tant.
When rotating your tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left
rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to
right rear. Right rear to left front.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown
on the Tire-Loading Information label. Make
certain that all wheel nuts are properly tigh-
tened. See page 233.
Flat spotting
All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
or when the car is driven hard. After the car
has been parked with hot tires and the tires
have cooled down, a flat spot can form in the
tire, where it is in contact with the ground.
The same can occur if the car has not been
moved for a long time.
Flat spots can cause vibration that can be
felt through the steering wheel, similar to
that experienced when the wheels need
balancing.
Flat spots of this type disappear once the
tires get hot again, usually after 10–15 miles
(20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed.
WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
When you change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See “Changing a wheel” on
page 231.
219Car care and technical information
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is
to check the treadwear indicators, which will
appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
You can see the indicators at three or
more places around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing
through the tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other
damage that can’t be repaired well
because of the size or location of the
damage.
Treadwear indicators
The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
form of smooth, treadless strips across the
width, which become visible when only
2/32" (1.6 mm) of tread remains. As soon as
the indicators become visible, new tires
should be fitted without delay.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
limit for minimum tread depth in your
country and also any regulations gover-
ning the use of winter (snow) tires.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you
need, look at the Tire-Loading Information
label.
If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than
those supplied with the car, consult your
Saab dealer first as to the possibilities
available.
Wheels/tires combinations that are not
approved by Saab can negatively affect the
car’s directional stability, steering and bra-
king in both wet and dry conditions.
SG840
Wear indicators
220 Car care and technical information
The wheels and tires have been carefully
matched to the characteristics of the car and
play a key role in its outstanding roadhol-
ding and handling.
Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire
combination will work in the best possible
way, just because it can be fitted to the car.
To ensure that the speedometer is as accu-
rate as possible it should be reprogrammed
if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
Contact a Saab dealer.
Because of front wheel drive, the front tires
tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New
tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that
tires on the same axle have the same
amount of tread.
Store wheels lying flat or hanging
never
standing upright.
NOTICE
Always
consult your Saab dealer before
changing the wheels and tires on your
Saab.
Wide wheels and tires with sidewalls that
are too low can:
be damaged in potholes etc.
cause springs, shock absorbers and
wheel bearings and body mountings
can be overloaded.
cause the wheels to come into contact
with chassis and body components.
can affect the function of the Elec-
tronic Stability Program (ESP).
The speed and load limits for the tires
must not be exceeded; see page 225.
Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.
The maximum permissible offset is
49 mm.
WARNING
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes or types (radial and bias-
belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the same size and type tires on all
wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was devel-
oped for use on your vehicle. See
“Compact spare tire” on page 230.
WARNING
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
221Car care and technical information
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-
der and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the
system developed by the United States
National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion, which grades tires by treadwear, trac-
tion and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United
States.) The grades are molded on the side-
walls of most passenger car tires. The Uni-
form Tire Quality Grading system does not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12
inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-pro-
duction tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary
with respect to these grades, they must also
conform to federal safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire Perfor-
mance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and a half (1.5) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance. War-
ning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dis-
sipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly infla-
ted and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
222 Car care and technical information
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give
you the longest tire life and best overall per-
formance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel
balancing are not needed. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pul-
ling one way or the other, the alignment may
need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or
badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel
leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions
exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you
need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,
offset and be mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only
with new Saab original equipment parts.
This way, you will be sure to have the right
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
vehicle.
Make sure tires with Tire Pressure Monitors
are fitted as replacement tires on cars with
this system.
Notice:
The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake coo-
ling, speedometer or odometer calibra-
tion, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a wheel” on page 231.
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts
and wheel nuts for replacement.
WARNING
When fitting just
one
new pair of tires,
these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
as these are more critical to the direc-
tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
should therefore be moved to the front.
WARNING
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been
used or how far it’s been driven. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you
have to replace a wheel, use a new GM
original equipment wheel.
223Car care and technical information
Tire Chains
Notice:
If your vehicle does not have
225/45R17 size tires, use tire chains only
where legal and only when you must.
Contact your Saab dealer regarding sui-
table snow chains. Install them on the
front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely faste-
ned. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle,
stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Dri-
ving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow-out” while
you’re driving, especially if you maintain
your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,
it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But
if you should ever have a “blow-out”, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what
to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a
drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and
grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to main-
tain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blow-out, particularly on a curve, acts
much like a skid and may require the same
correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear
blowout, remove your foot from the accele-
rator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can
still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off
the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use your jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.
WARNING
If your vehicle has 225/45 R17 size tires,
don’t use tire chains, there’s not enough
clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
the tire chains could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that manu-
facturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it’s
contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin
your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
224 Car care and technical information
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded
into it´s sidewall.
Tire size:
The tire size ia a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a parti-
cular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, cons-
truction type and service description.
Department of Transportation (DOT):
The Department of Transportation (DOT)
code indicates that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation
Motor Vehicle Safety standards.
Tire Identification Number (TIN):
The let-
ters and numbers following DOT code are
the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire was manu-
factured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire.
Tire Ply Material:
The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resis-
tance. For more information see “Uniform
Tire Quality Grading” on page 221.
Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Max-
imum load that can be carried and the max-
imum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pres-
sure see “Lowest recommended tire pres-
sure, cold tires” on page 261and “Loading
Your Vehicle” on page 226.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example
of a typical passenger car tire size.
Tire Width:
The three-digit number indica-
tes the tire section width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
215
/
55 R 16 93 H
| |||||
abcdef
aTire Width
b Aspect Ratio
c Belt Rating
d Rim diameter
e Load range
f Speed rating
225Car care and technical information
Aspect ratio:
A two-digit number that indi-
cates the tire height-to-width measure-
ments. For example, if the tire size aspect
ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illus-
tration, it would mean that the tire´s sidewall
is 55% as high as it is wide.
Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter “R” means radial ply construction; the
letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply cons-
truction; and the letter “B” means belted-
bias ply construction.
Rim Diameter:
Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Load range:
The load range represents the
load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.
Speed Rating:
The maximum speed that a
tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”.
Tire markings
An example of the meaning of the different
markings in a tire size is given below for a
tire size of:
215/55 R16 93 V
215 Tire section width, mm
55 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
is 55 % of the section width
R Radial ply
16 Wheel rim diameter 16 in at bead
seats
93 Tire load code
V Speed marking
Tire load index
91 Tire approved for max. 1355 lbs.
(615 kg)
93 Max. 1433 lbs (650 kg)
94 Max. 1477 lbs (670 kg)
Speed ratings
Q Tire approved for speeds up to 100
mph (160 km/h)
S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)
T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)
H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)
V Max. 150 mph (240 km/h)
W Max. 167 mph (270 km/h)
Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)
TIN-code
a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark
b Tire Size
c Tire Type Code
d Date of Manufacture
226 Car care and technical information
Loading Your Vehicle
This is an example of what your vehicle´s
Tire-Loading Information/Certification label
might look like. It is located on the B-pillar
and shows how much weight your vehicle
may properly carry. The label tells you the
proper size, and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It
also gives you important information about
the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle
Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-
installed options.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure:
The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight:
This means the combi-
ned weight of optional accessories, for
example, automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio:
The relationship of a tire´s
height to its width.
Belt:
A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other rein-
forcecing materials.
Bias Ply Tire:
A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
alternate angles substantially less than 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure:
The amount of air
pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before
a tire have built up heat from driving. See
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 217.
Curb weight:
This means the weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and optional
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers
and cargo.
DOT Markings:
A code molded into the
sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation motor vehicle safety stan-
dards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanume-
ric designator which can also indentify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand
and date of production.
GVWR:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see
“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 226.
GAWR FRT:
Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the front axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle”
on page 226.
GAWR RR:
Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the rear axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle” on
page 226.
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of
an asymmetrical tire that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa):
The metric unit for air
pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:
A tire used
on light duty trucks and some multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
Load Index:
An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
This label can only be found on vehicles
sold in the U.S.
Vehicles sold in Canada have the tire
information label in the glovebox, see
page 262.
227Car care and technical information
Maximum Load rating:
The load rating for
a tire at the maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The
sum of curb weight; accessory weight;
vehicle capacity weight; and production
options weight.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pres-
sure:
The maximum cold inflation pressure
to which a tire may be inflated.
Normal occupant weight:
The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat mul-
tipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “Loading
Your Vehicle” on page 226.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated sea-
ting positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that faces outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a
whitewall bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name
molding on the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks
and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer´s recommended tire
inflation pressure shown on the tire label,
see “Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 217
and “Loading Your Vehicle” on page 226.
Radial Ply Tire:
A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to the cen-
terline of the tread.
Rim:
A metal support for a tire or a tire and
tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall:
The portion of a tire between the
tread and the bead.
Speed rating:
An alphanumeric code
assigned to a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction:
The friction between the tire and
the road surface. The amount of grip provi-
ded.
Treadwear Indicators:
Narrow bands,
sometimes called “wear bars”, that show
across the tread of a tire when only
2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is
Time for New Tires” on page 219.
Tread Width:
The width of the tirs tread.
UTQGS:
Uniform Tire Quality Grade Stan-
dards, a tire information system that provi-
des consumers with ratings for a tire´s trac-
tion, temperature and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The rating
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See
“Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on
page 221.
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
Is the number of
designated seating positions multipled by
150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo
load. See “Loading Your Vehicle” on
page 226.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:
Load
on an individual tire due to curb weight,
accessory weight, occupant weight and
cargo weight.
Vehicle label:
A label permanently
attached to a vehicle showing original
equipment tire size and the recommended
cold inflation pressure. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” on page 226.
228 Car care and technical information
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1 Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed
XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s
label.
2 Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3 Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4 The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =
650 lbs.).
5 Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
Winter tires
Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
winter climates where the majority of your
driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
dealer can advise you of to the correct size
tire for your car (if different from the original
size) and also supply Saab approved winter
tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.
Winter tires normally use a different speed
rating compared to summer/all season tires.
Make sure not to exceed the stated speed
rating on the tires you use.
229Car care and technical information
Tire date code
Tires should be regarded as perishable
goods. As the tires age, the rubber becomes
progressively harder, and the roadholding
ability of the tires diminishes. This is particu-
larly true on winter tires.
Tires now have a date-code marking for the
year of manufacture. The first two digits
denote the week number and the two last
digits the year. The ”<” symbol points to the
year.
Accordingly, a date code of 0200 signifies
that the tire was manufactured in week 02,
2000.
IB1564
Tire date code
230 Car care and technical information
Compact spare tire
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the tire. Its use is
only permitted when a standard tire has sus-
tained a puncture. The maximum life of the
tire is only 2000 miles (3,500 km).
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
compact spare fitted.
The compact spare should be inflated to
60 psi (420 kPa). Carry the punctured tire in
the spare-wheel well under the luggage-
compartment floor.
Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
as soon as possible (see also page 170).
The spare tire, together with the jack, front
towrope attachment eye and toolkit, is
stowed away underneath the luggage-
compartment floor.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy
wheel it can be placed outside up in the
spare-wheel well but
only
while driving to
the closest dealer.
A general rule is that all heavy loads must
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment, see page 123 and 126.
IB3234
Hanging up the cover, 9-5 SportWagon
IB3233
Spare wheel (under panel in luggage
compartment)
231Car care and technical information
Changing a wheel
WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed if
the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack
provided with your vehicle only for chang-
ing a flat tire.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1 Set the parking brake firmly.
2 If you have an automatic transmis-
sion, put the shift lever in PARK (P).
For a manual transmission, leave the
car in gear (1st or REVERSE (R)).
3 Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4 Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle won't
move, you should put blocks at the front
and rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would be the
tire, on the other side, at the opposite end
of the vehicle.
The car jack is designed solely for use
in changing a wheel or fitting snow
chains.
It must not be used to
support the car during repair work
or servicing.
Never
crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack.
Raising your vehicle too high or with
the jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to
fit the jack lift head into the proper
location before raising the vehicle, and
raise the vehicle only far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for
the spare tire to fit (no more than 25
mm or 1 inch clearance between the
ground and the bottom of the tire).
Switch on the hazard warning lights if
the car is on a road.
The jack should be stored correctly
under the carpeting in the trunk. If it
lies loose in the car, it could thrown
forward and cause personal injury in
the event of a crash or if the car rolls
over.
Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
threads of the wheel bolts if the car has
been driven for several years exclu-
sively with alloy wheels.
If steel wheels are being installed, the
bolt hole threads in the brake hubs
should be cleaned before the thinner
steel wheels are fitted. It may other-
wise not be possible to achieve the
correct clamping force, despite tight-
ening the wheel bolts to the correct
torque.
232 Car care and technical information
To jack up the car, apply the jack to one of
the special jacking points under the sills.
If a floor jack is used, it can be applied to the
standard jacking points used by the dealer.
A floor jack can lift both front wheels or both
rear wheels off the ground simultaneously.
A jack stand must then be applied underne-
ath the front of the engine subframe (at the
fixing point for the towrope-attachment eye)
or to the rear towrope-attachment eye (or
under the trailer hitch, if fitted).
1 Put the car in 1st gear (automatic trans-
mission: move selector to the P position)
and apply the parking brake.
2 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
before placing it under the recess in the
sill.
Make sure that the jack fully engages
the recess in the sill and that the base of
the jack is steady and flat on the ground.
3 Remove the wheel cover (where appli-
cable).
Loosen the wheel bolts by half a turn.
4 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of
the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and
lift off the wheel.
5 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact
surfaces between the wheel and brake
disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the
hub.
6 Fit the wheel and screw in the bolts in the
sequence shown (opposite pairs) - see
page 234.
NOTICE
Apply the jack only to the jacking points
indicated on the body.
Position for jack
IB1838
IB1553
Positioning the jack
233Car care and technical information
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
and wheel to be seated correctly.
7 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
bolts to the correct torque in the
sequence shown (opposite pairs).
Tightening torque
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm).
8 Check-tighten the wheel bolts after a few
miles.
Tightening torque
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
NOTICE
When refitting wheel covers (where
applicable), make sure that the valve
protrudes through the marked hole in
the wheel cover.
Do not overtighten the bolts using an
impact wrench: not only can this
damage the wheels but it can also
make it impossible to undo the bolts
using the wheel wrench in the car’s
toolkit.
Clean any rust or dirt from the contact sur-
faces between the wheel and brake disc
IB2428
Do not wipe away the grease in the hub.
IB1130
Jacking points for a trolley jack
234 Car care and technical information
Air conditioning
(ACC)
WARNING
All repairs and adjustments on the A/C
system must be carried out by a Saab
dealer authorized for this kind of work.
The A/C system is pressurized. Do not
break any connections or undo A/C
system components.
Escaping refrigerant gas can cause
visual impairment or other injury.
NOTICE
The A/C system is designed for use
with R134a refrigerant.
Refrigerant handling requires special
equipment and special procedures for
charging and draining the system.
Never mix R134a and R12 refriger-
ants.
IB1800
IB1800
Removing the wheel cover
IB539
Tightening sequence, wheel bolts
235Car care and technical information
Fault diagnosis
If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
a number of checks you can perform your-
self. If the fault persists, however, have the
system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
Important!
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-
densation is drained off through two outlets
underneath the floor of the car in the vicinity
of the front doors. It is therefore perfectly
normal for water to be seen dripping from
these outlets when the car is parked. The
warmer the ambient air and the higher the
humidity, the greater will be the amount of
condensation formed.
Inadequate cooling:
a Check that the condenser (forward of
the radiator) has not become clogged
with dirt and insects.
b Make sure that the drive belt for the com-
pressor is not slipping.
c Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
and compressor.
Maintenance
The drive belt for the compressor should
be inspected under the regular service
program.
Clean dirt and insects away from the con-
denser and radiator to prevent clogging.
When washing the car, use the hose to
spray the radiator and condenser (located
forward of the radiator) from both sides
(both from the front of the car and from
inside the engine bay). Do not use a pres-
sure washer.
Caution: Do not use the hose when the
engine is hot.
Other than in extremely cold weather, do not
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
Note:
The A/C system will only operate
when the outdoor temperature is above the
freezing point (0°C, 32°F).
Safety belts
Regularly check the function of the safety
belts as follows:
Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply.
The safety belt should
lock
and it should
not be possible to withdraw it further.
Check the anchorage points in the floor.
They must not have suffered rust damage.
There must be no frayed threads in the web-
bing.
Safety belts must not come into contact with
substances such as polishes, oils or other
chemicals. If the straps are dirty, wash them
with warm water and a detergent or have
them replaced.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other
components must be inspected by an
authorized Saab dealer.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself.
236 Car care and technical information
Upholstery and trim
To remove lint or hairs from the seat uphol-
stery or headlining, use a moist, lint-free
cloth or a special lint remover (brush or rol-
ler). Remove any dirty marks using a cloth
moistened with lukewarm soapy water.
When using a stain remover, always work
from the outside towards the center to avoid
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
remain, it can usually be removed using
lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
Wet patches left by spilled soft drinks or thin
oil must be wiped off immediately using an
absorbent material, such as a paper towel,
and treated with stain remover.
Alcohol is recommended for removing
grease or oil stains, and a semi-stiff brush
may also be used.
Cleaning and caring for leather
upholstery
The principal reason for treating leather
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appea-
rance and to provide it with a protective film.
Discoloration caused by dust and wear
mainly affects the lighter shades, although
this is not detrimental to the leather
indeed, the patina resulting from use is often
considered desirable in leather. But if the
leather is allowed to become too grubby, it
can start to look shabby.
It is a good idea to clean and recondition the
leather twice a year – in conjunction with a
general spring-cleaning of the car – after the
winter and in the autumn, for instance. In
hot, dry climates, the leather will need to be
treated more frequently. Recommended
conditioner – Saab Leather Care Lotion.
Do not use unknown harsh polishing
agents, cleaning agents, sprays, coarse
soap or hot water.
Textile carpeting
Vacuum clean the carpeting regularly. Car-
pets can also be cleaned using a brush, or
carpet shampoo applied with a sponge. Do
not use vacuum cleaners outdoors unless
they are properly grounded.
237Car care and technical information
Washing the car
Wash your car frequently. To facilitate clea-
ning, a suitable detergent can be added to
the water, which should be lukewarm. Saab
offers a full line of car care products, inclu-
ding car wash, for the care of your vehicle.
See your dealer for available products or
visit www.saabcatalog.com (U.S. residents
only).
Do not use a pressure washer at close
range on stone chip damage, scratches or
other damage to the paintwork. The paint
can otherwise start to flake.
Remove any bird droppings without delay,
as these can discolor the paintwork and
prove difficult to polish out.
Use a soft cloth moistened with methyl alco-
hol to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do
not use strong cleaners, as these can dry
out the paintwork.
The underside of the car also needs wash-
ing regularly, and this should be done extra
thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
underside of the car by hand if the car is usu-
ally washed in an automatic car wash wit-
hout special facilities for underbody clea-
ning.
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
immediately after washing to avoid smears
and streaks.
Clean the window glass inside and out using
a high quality window cleaner. This is parti-
cularly important when the car is new, as
upholstery and trim have a tendency to
sweat a little at first.
Keep the glass well cleaned, as this helps to
prevent misting.
NOTICE
Avoid using any alcohol-based cleaners
on the front and rear light clusters, as
these can cause cracking of the lenses.
NOTICE
The door mirrors must be fully
retracted before the car enters an
automatic car wash.
Remove fixed antennas, e.g. for
mobile phone, before putting car
through an automatic car wash.
Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.
Wet brake discs may reduce the
performance of the brakes.
Cars with Saab Parking Assistance:
Do not spray the sensors or closer
than 20 cm to the sensors with a pres-
sure washer, as this can damage
them.
238 Car care and technical information
Waxing and polishing
Other than in exceptional cases, do not use
abrasive polishes containing a cutting agent
on a new car. Always wash the car tho-
roughly before waxing or polishing.
Engine compartment
Clean the engine compartment using an
engine detergent and rinse with hot water.
Cover the headlights. Do not use high-pres-
sure washer. Avoid spraying the hood liner,
as this can become heavy and hang down
and touch the engine when the hood is clo-
sed.
Do not use gasoline as a cleaning agent or
solvent when carrying out repairs or mainte-
nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-
ronmentally safe degreasing agents.
Touching up the paint
Damaged paintwork should be treated as
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
the greater the risk of corrosion. The anti-
perforation warranty does not cover corro-
sion resulting from untreated defects.
Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is
usually extensive and can only be properly
restored by professionals.
However, you can repair small scratches
and stone-chip damage yourself. The
necessary tools and materials, such as pri-
mer, touch-up paint and brushes, are avai-
lable from your Saab dealer.
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
where the metal has not been exposed and
an undamaged layer of paint remains,
touch-up paint can usually be applied
directly, after any dirt has been scraped
away using a pointed knife.
If corrosion has already set in, e.g. as a
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If pos-
sible, the damaged area should be taken
back to the bare metal. The metal should
then be primed with two thin coats of primer
applied by brush.
After the primer has dried, apply several thin
layers of topcoat enamel until the surface of
the repaired area is flush with the surroun-
ding paintwork.
Stir both primer and touch-up enamel tho-
roughly before use and allow each coat to
dry before applying the next.
239Car care and technical information
Two-coat enamel
As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
applied in two operations. The first coat, the
base color, contains the pigment, metal
flakes and binder. The second coat consists
of a clear enamel, which provides the final
gloss for the paintwork and protects the
base from moisture and environmental con-
taminants.
Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
2 Apply the primer, base color and finally,
the enamel. To achieve the best finish,
apply two or three coats of primer.
IB1334
Surface-treatment composition
1 Body panel
2 Zinc (certain panel sections only) 7.5 µm
3 Phosphate coating
4 Cathodic ED 23 µm
5 Intermediate coat 35 µm
6 Metallic base 15 µm
7 Clear enamel /solid enamel 40 µm
240 Car care and technical information
Anti-corrosion
treatment
The entire car is corrosion-protected at the
factory in different stages by an electrolytic
immersion coating and a PVC-based pro-
tective coating to protect against corrosion
caused by stones flung up by the wheels. A
thin penetrating anti-rust oil is also applied
in cavities and body members.
In addition to conventional anti-corrosion
treatment like painting, underbody treat-
ment and cavity treatment, most of the body
panel surfaces are galvanized. These
include the hood, the doors and the under-
body.
The anti-corrosion treatment on the under-
side of the car and inside the wheel arches
is particularly exposed to constant wear and
possible damage, the degree of which will
obviously depend on driving conditions.
What causes rust?
Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-
ject to rusting whenever air and moisture
manage to penetrate the protective finish,
and body panels may rust through if the pro-
cess is unchecked. Rusting can occur
wherever water is trapped or where the
car’s panels are continuously damp.
Damage to paint and undercoating by sto-
nes, gravel and minor crashes immediately
exposes metal to air and moisture. Road
salts used for de-icing will collect on the
bottom of the car and promote rusting.
Areas of the country with high humidity have
great potential for rust problems, especially
where salt is used on roads or there is moist
sea air. Industrial pollution (fallout) may also
damage paint and promote rusting.
Preventive maintenance
The following procedures are necessary to
help protect against rusting. Refer also to
the terms and conditions of the Sheet Metal
Coverage described in the warranty
booklet.
1
Wash the car frequently, and wax at
least twice a year.
Under adverse con-
ditions, where there is a rapid buildup of
dirt, sand or road salt, wash your car at
least once a week. After extreme expo-
sure to salted snow or slush, evidenced
by a white film on the car, wash the car
immediately. Frequent washing will pre-
vent paint damage from acid rain and
other airborne contaminants such as
tree sap and bird droppings. If any of
these contaminants are noticed on the
car the finish should be washed immedi-
ately.
Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
with water to loosen and flush off heavy
concentrations of dirt (include the
underbody).
Sponge the car with a solution of either
a good quality car soap or mild general
purpose (dish washing) detergent and
water.
Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
After washing, check and clear all
drains in doors and body panels.
Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
chamois.
241Car care and technical information
2
Clean the underside of the car during
the winter.
Use high pressure water to
clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
wheel wells) at least at mid- winter and
in the spring.
3
Inspect the car frequently for leaks or
damage, and arrange for needed
repairs promptly.
After washing or after
heavy rain, check for leaks. When wash-
ing the car inspect body surfaces for
paint damage. While checking for leaks,
lift the floor mats and check beneath
them. Water can collect in these areas
and remain for prolonged periods. Dry
any wet areas including the floor mats.
Have leaks repaired as soon as pos-
sible.
Use touch-up paint to repair small scrat-
ches or minor finish damage. Areas
where metal is exposed will rust quickly
and MUST be repaired immediately by
touch-up or professional repainting.
Rust must be removed, the bare metal
primed and painted. Major body
damage should be repaired immediately
and new panels or exposed areas
should be undercoated with anti- corro-
sion material.
Repairs of this type are the owner’s
responsibility and are not covered under
warranty.
4
Inspect the undercoating and touch
up if necessary.
Pay particular atten-
tion to the fenders and wheel housings,
which are exposed to abrasion by flying
gravel, etc. If the composition has worn
or flaked off, the steel must be tho-
roughly cleaned and dried before a fresh
coat is applied. The cleaning is best
done with a scraper and a steel wire
brush, followed by washing with solvent.
Apply the new coating thinly, as other-
wise it may run off or fall off when dry.
For long trips
Before setting off on a long journey, it is
advisable to have your car checked over by
your Saab dealer.
Obtain a few important items to take along
on your journey such as spare bulbs, wiper
blades, fuses, a Poly-V-belt and the like.
You can check some points yourself befor-
ehand:
Make sure that the engine is in good con-
dition.
Check that no oil or gasoline leaks out of
the engine or gearbox/transmission.
Check the coolant and power steering
fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
Inspect the Poly-V-belt and replace it if it
shows any signs of hard wear.
Check the battery charge.
Check the tires for tread pattern and air
pressure, including the compact spare
wheel.
Check the brakes.
Check all bulbs.
Check for the presence of the tool kit and
the jack in the car.
242 Car care and technical information
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials
A typical car consists of metals (65–75 %),
plastics (10–15 %), rubber (5 %) and small
quantities of glass, wood, paper and texti-
les. The recycling of metals has been com-
monplace for a long time now.
To facilitate sorting of other materials for
recycling, plastic parts, for instance, have
been marked to identify the precise nature
of the plastic.
The quantity of materials in the car that can
be recycled or recovered depends on the
scrapping facilities in different countries. EU
legislation that comes into force in 2006 will
require a minimum of 85 % of the total
weight of materials to be recycled. Howe-
ver, every major car salvage yard in each
market will receive details from Saab of how
the highest percentage of materials can be
reclaimed.
Headlight aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlight
aiming system equipped with vertical
aiming device. The aim has been preset at
the factory and should normally not need
further adjustments.
If your headlights are damaged in a crash,
the headlight aim may be affected. If you
believe your headlights need to be re-
aimed, we recommend that you take it to
your Saab dealer for service, however, it is
possible for you to re-aim your headlights as
described in the following procedure.
To check the aim, the vehicle should be pro-
perly prepared as follows:
The vehicle shall be placed so that the
headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall or other flat surface. The
aiming area should be darkened, this will
improve your ability to see the beam of the
low beam headlight being aimed.
The vehicle must have all four wheels on
a perfectly level surface which is level all
the way to the wall or other flat surface.
The vehicle should be placed so it is per-
pendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel
tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
(75 kg) on the drivers seat.
WARNING
Before checking/adjusting the headlight
aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
danger of fingers and hands being injured
by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when
the engine is switched off.
NOTICE
To make sure that your headlights are
aimed properly read all instructions
before beginning. Failure to follow these
instructions could cause damage to
headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
headlight.
243Car care and technical information
The vehicle should be fully assembled
and all other work stopped while headlight
aiming is being done.
The vehicle should not have any snow, ice
or mud attached to it.
Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
pressure.
Close all doors.
Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-
sion.
Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle
low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will
be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps
are aimed properly.
If you find that the headlight needs adjust-
ment follow these steps:
1 Open the hood and locate the vertical
aiming device.
2 Locate the marker on the lens.
3 Measure the distance from the ground to
the aim marker on each lens.
Subtract 2 inches if the vehicle is equip-
ped with halogen lamps, record this dis-
tance.
Subtract 3 inches if the vehicle is equip-
ped with xenon lamps, record this dis-
tance.
4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure
from the ground to the recorded dis-
tance (see point 4) and draw a horizontal
line the width of the vehicle.
IB1950
2
1
4 3
1 Wall or garage door
2 25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.
3 Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.
4 Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches for vehicles with halogen lamps and
3 inches for vehicles with xenon lamps.
244 Car care and technical information
5 Turn on the low beam headlights and
place a piece of cardboard or equivalent
(although not directly on the lens) in front
of the headlight not being aimed. This
should allow the beam cut-off of the
headlight being aimed to be seen on the
flat surface.
6 Turn the vertical aiming screw until the
horizontal cut-off of the headlight is alig-
ned with the horizontal line on the wall.
NOTICE
Do not cover a headlight directly on the
lens to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlight may cause
excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlight.
IB1951
Vertical aiming device
IB1952
Aiming marker on headlight lens
IB1953
Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface
IB1954
Correctly adjusted low beam
245Customer Assistance and Information
Customer
Assistance and
Information
Maintenance schedule __ 246
Owner assistance ______ 247
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S.A.)______________ 248
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
government __________ 248
Vehicle Data Collection
and Event Data
Recorders ___________ 249
IB1941
246 Customer Assistance and Information
Maintenance schedule
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
service program to the purchaser/operator
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
to ensure the proper emission control sys-
tems function, safety and reliability of the
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
maintenance is recommended for specific
components when the car is operated under
certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-
nance is always good advice!
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser-
vice manuals and parts and technical ser-
vice bulletins from Saab and are able,
through their franchise agreement, to attend
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
tools and technical assistance and pur-
chase original equipment service and
replacement parts.
Today’s complex automobiles should only
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
service professionals. A Saab dealer is your
best choice.
Service intervals
The maintenance schedule prescribes a
service at every 15,000 miles (24,000 km)
thereafter (15,000, 30,000, 45,000 miles/
24,000, 48,000, 72,000 km etc.).
Engine oil and filter changes
Changing the engine oil and filter is required
at every service point. Use only a Saab
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
stated in the Specification section of this
Owner’s Manual. The use of extra additives
in the oil is not necessary and is not recom-
mended, and may be harmful to turbo-
chargers.
More frequent oil changes are recom-
mended if your vehicle is operated under
the following conditions:
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to
16 km). This is particularly important
when outside temperatures are below
freezing.
Most trips include extensive idling (such
as frequent stop-and-go driving).
Most trips are through dusty areas.
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier
on top of your vehicle.
If the vehicle is used for delivery service,
police, taxi or other commercial applica-
tions.
If your driving habits match this description,
have the engine oil and filter changed in-
between normal services at 7,500 mile
(12,000 km) intervals. The Saab Warranty
and Service Record Booklet has provisions
to record extra oil changes.
247Customer Assistance and Information
Service record retention
It is the owner´s responsibility to retain ser-
vice records. If possible, you should keep
copies of all shop work orders for all service
and repairs, whenever performed. As indi-
cated in the new car and emission control
system warranties, it is important to docu-
ment that all necessary maintenance has
been done.
HOW THE SERVICE RECORD IS
ORGANIZED
The service record is comprised of a series
of coupons on which to record services as
they are performed. There are additional
coupons for documenting extra engine oil
and filter changes, extra automatic trans-
mission fluid services necessary for severe
service conditions, and brake fluid changes.
HOW TO USE THE SERVICE
RECORD COUPONS
When the car is brought to a Saab dealer for
scheduled manitenance, present the Saab
Warranty and Service Record Booklet to the
service manager. When the technician has
completed the service, the technician will
sign the maintenance record. The person
resposible for quality assurance at the deal-
ership will also sign and stamp the record
with the dealer identification stamp.
Service costs
Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-
vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-
vice times for each service point do not
include the labor required to replace wear
items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
repairs found to be necessary as a result of
the inspections included in these times.
Additional labor and parts will be charged
for such work when necessary, except as
covered under an applicable Saab warranty
or any optional extended service contract.
Transmission fluid changes or suspension
alignment, when necessary, are also addi-
tional.
Dealer charges for general shop material,
regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-
cling expenses or other operation costs may
also be applied to service and repair
invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
locality.
Owner assistance
Warranties and service problem
assistance
For complete information about all applica-
ble warranties, including the New Car War-
ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-
sion Warranty and Emission Perforation
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-
vice Record Booklet which accompanies
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
assistance information including Saab
Roadside Assistance. If the booklet is lost or
misplaced, a new one may be ordered
through a Saab dealer or by contacting
Saab.
In the U.S. there is a national Customer
Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
The toll-free number to call from all 50 states
is 1-800-955-9007.
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A list of authorized Saab sales and service
dealers is available for those planning to
travel in the United States and Canada.
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
Customer Assistance Center in the country
in which they are traveling.
248 Customer Assistance and Information
Change of Address Notification
(U.S. and Canada)
Two change of address cards are provided
at the end of the Warranty and Service
Record Booklet. Knowing your current
address allows Saab to contact you in the
event of a recall or service campaign.
Please help us keep our records up to date
for your own peace of mind.
Service information
Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-5
car line can be ordered through your Saab
dealer or by visiting
www.saabtechinfo.com. These are com-
prehensive manuals on CD rom, geared to
use by professional technicians.
Consult your Saab dealer for prices and for
a listing for your model.
Reporting Safety
Defects (U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-
9393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Reporting Safety
Defects to the Canadian
government
If you live in Canada, and believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in
addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited.
You may write to Transport Canada at Box
8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you
will notify us. In Canada, please call our
Saab Customer Assistance Centre at 1-
800-263- 1999.
Or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.
249Customer Assistance and Information
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehi-
cles, has a number of sophisticated com-
puter systems that monitor and control sev-
eral aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle comput-
ers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor condi-
tions for air bag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and
to help the driver control the vehicle in diffi-
cult driving situations. Some information
may be stored during regular operations to
facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash
event by computer systems commonly
called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record
information about the condition of the vehi-
cle and how it was operated, such as data
related to engine speed, brake application,
throttle position, vehicle speed, steering
wheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety belt
usage, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-
mance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehi-
cle crash performance and may be used to
improve crash performance of future vehi-
cles and driving safety. Unlike the data
recorders on many airplanes, these on-
board systems do not record sounds, such
as conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment
is needed and access to the vehicle or the
SDM is required.
Saab will not access information about a
crash event or share it with others other than
with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
the lessee,
in response to an official request of police
or similar government office,
as part of Saab’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process, or
as required by law.
In addition, once Saab collects or receives
data, Saab may
use the data for Saab research needs,
make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be main-
tained and need is shown, or
share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-Saab organiza-
tions for research purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®,
please check lthe OnStar® subscription
service agreement or manual for informa-
tion on its operations and data collection.
250 Customer Assistance and Information
(This page has been left blank)
251Specifications
General_______________ 252
Engine _______________ 254
Fuel__________________ 254
Engine oil_____________ 255
Engine variants________ 256
Electrical system_______ 257
Drive belts ____________ 257
Manual gearbox________ 258
Automatic transmission_ 258
Suspension ___________ 259
Steering ______________ 259
Brake system__________ 259
Wheels and tires _______ 260
Plates and labels_______ 262
IB603
Specifications
252 Specifications
General
Overall length, including bumpers:
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 190.0 in (4827 mm)
9-5 SportWagon __________________ 190.1 in (4828 mm)
Overall width, including door mirrors ____ 80.4 in (2042 mm)
Maximum height:
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 58.1 in (1475 mm)
9-5 SportWagon __________________ 59.1 in (1501 mm)
Wheelbase _______________________ 106.4 in (2703 mm)
Ground clearance at gross vehicle weight approx. 4.6 in
(116 mm)
Tra ck :
Front __________________________ 59.9 in (1522 mm) *)
Rear ___________________________ 59.9 in (1522 mm) *)
Turning circle (curb to curb) ___________ 37,1 ft (11.3 m)
Turning circle (measured at vehicle extremi-
ties) ____________________________ 39,0 ft (11.9 m)
Number of seats (incl. driver) _________ 5
*)
Specified track applies to wheel sizes:
6 x 15 & 6.5 x 16
Permissible load (in addition to driver) = GVW minus curb weight
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
Chassis number in engine bay
Weight ready for driving (i.e. with full fuel
tank, washer-fluid reservoir, standard tools
and spare wheel)___________________
3460–3780 lbs.
(1570–1715 kg)
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) ___________ 4390–4710 lbs.
(1990–2135 kg)
Maximum axle load:
Front ___________________________ 2590 lbs. (1175 kg)
Rear, 9-5 Sedan___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)
Rear, 9-5 SportWagon ______________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
Weight distribution:
Curb weight, front/rear ______________ 60/40 %
GVW, front/rear ___________________ 50/50 %
Maximum roof load __________________ 220 lbs (100 kg)
253Specifications
Trailer:
Luggage compartment
Volume (SAE):
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 15.9 cu.ft.
(450 litres)
9-5 SportWagon, rear seat upright ____ 31.4 cu. ft.
(890 litres)
9-5 SportWagon, rear seat folded_____ 73.0 cu. ft.
(2067 litres)
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Sedan:
Rear seat upright _________________ 43.0 in (1092 mm)
Rear seat folded down _____________ 67.5 in (1714 mm)
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Sport-
Wagon:
Rear seat upright _________________ 42.8 in (1087 mm)
Rear seat folded __________________ 68.2 in (1732 mm)
WARNING
The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are
fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of
these.
When carrying a load in the luggage compartment, make sure
that it is tied down securely, particularly when part or all of the
rear seat is folded down.
Maximum towing speed, trailer with brakes 60 mph (100 km/h)
Trailer with brakes _________________ Maximum weight:
3500 lbs (1588 kg)
Trailer without brakes ______________ Maximum weight:
1000 lbs (450 kg)
Maximum load on ball hitch __________ 110–165 lbs
(50–75 kg)
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
Saab Automobile AB.
Note that local restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and
weights (see page 161).
254 Specifications
Engine
Fuel
4-cylinder ________________________ Four cylinders, twin
overhead cams-
hafts, 16 valves and
two balancer shafts.
Cylinder bores _____________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)
Stroke ___________________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)
Swept volume _____________________ 139.7 cu.in
(2.290 litres)
Idling speed _______________________ 825 rpm (man.)
860 rpm (aut.)
Antifreeze_________________________ Saab-approved
antifreeze
Coolant capacity ___________________ 7.8 qts (7.4 litres)
Fuel-tank capacity ____________ 18.5 gal. (70 litres)
For optimum performance Saab
recommends: _______________ 2.3t 185 hp (Linear)
AON 90.
2.3T 220 hp (Arc) and
2.3 Turbo 250 hp (Aero) –
AON 93.*
* If AON 90 is used some decrease in engine power can occur.
Gasoline with a lower octane rating can be used, although not
lower than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall
slightly and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For
optimum performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.
For further information on fuel, see page 140.
255Specifications
Engine oil
To meet demands in Saab's extended service intervals all eng-
ines are filled with specially designed synthetic factory fill oils.
Long service intervals, fuel economy and environmental issues
are the base for our choice of oil. By using oils approved by Saab
you minimise the tendencies for oil sludge build, by that protec-
ting the engine from harmful, wear increasing, deposits.
Approved oils:
All gasoline engines - Fully Synthetic Engine Oil fulfilling
GM-LL-A-025 requirements.
Oil used at, or in-between, service must be approved according
to the engine specified classification to render possible the
usage of Saab Automobile AB specified service intervals.
Servicing/Oil changes:
To be able to use recommended service intervals the need to
use only approved engine oils is vital.
Use only engine oils
approved for your engine.
Service should be done according
to the recommended service intervals to optimize your engine's
function through out its entire life. Saab Automobile AB will not
take responsibility for any damage that might occur due to neg-
lecting to meet above mentioned requirements.
At your Saab dealers you can find Saab Genuine or Mobil eng-
ine oils. Among those there are oils specially designed to meet
your engines specific needs. We recommend that you, with the
help of our skilled service personnel, choose your oil from that
sortiment.
Other oil companies also have engine oils approved according
to GM specifications. Oils meeting these standards may be
identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic oils will meet
your engines requirements. You should only use oil that meets
your engines specific requirements (GM-LL-A-025).
Recommended oil viscosities
Viscosity is a measurement of the oils thickness. The thickness
influences, among other things, the fuel economy. For best func-
tion Saab recommends:
For gasoline engines:
SAE 0W-30
SAE 5W-30
or
SAE 0W-40 engine oil
Extra engine oil additives
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils are all you
will need for good engine performance and protection.
256 Specifications
Engine variants
When to change engine oil
Your vehicle will display when it is time for servicing on the SID,
based on the mileage and time since the last service.
Under normal circumstances the service indication will come
after:
Saab 9-5, 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 1 year.
For this service system to work it is of outmost importance that
the right engine oil is used.
When the message for service is displayed you need to have the
required service done as soon as possible.
After the service your service personnel will reset the service
indicator. It is important to reset the service indicator in order to
optimize the time to the next service.
Oil capacity incl. filter (on changing) ____ 4.1 qts (4.0 litres)
2.3t Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ___________ 185 hp (136 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800 rpm ___ 206.5 ft.lb
(280 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1
2.3T Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 220 hp (161 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800 rpm____ 228.6 ft.lb
(310 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1
2.3 Turbo Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 250 hp (184 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1900 rpm 258.0 ft.lb.
(350 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1
257Specifications
Electrical system Drive belts
Voltage __________________________ 12 V
Battery capacity ___________________ 70 Ah
Starter motor ______________________ 1.4 kW
Alternator rating ____________________ 140 A/14 V
Firing order _______________________ 1–3–4–2
Spark plugs:
2.3t ____________________________ NGK
BCPR 6ES-11
Electrode gap ____________________ 0.0141 in (1.05 mm)
2.3T and 2.3 Turbo ________________ NGK
PFR 6H-10
Electrode gap ____________________ 0.0374 in (0.95 mm)
Engine variants Outside length
Drive belt _________________________ 95.08 in
(2415 mm)
Drive belt
IB929
258 Specifications
Manual gearbox Automatic transmission
Type ____________________________ All-synchromesh
5-speed with final
drive and differen-
tial
Oil ______________________________ Saab MTF 0063
Oil capacity _______________________ 1.9 qts (1.8 litres)
Oil volume (on changing) ____________ 1.6 qts (1.5 litres)
Clutch type _______________________ Hydraulic, single
dry-plate clutch of
diaphragm-spring
type
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear: 27–29 / 43–47
Type _____________________________ Electronically con-
trolled 5-speed,
fully automatic with
hydraulic torque
converter, plane-
tary gear set and
integral final drive
Lock-up function in
selector positions 3,
4 and 5.
Selector-lever positions ______________ P R N D M L
Transmission-fluid capacity, dry transmis-
sion (incl. torque converter and oil cooler) 7.4 qts (7 litres)
Transmission fluid ___________________ Saab 3309 (mineral
oil based)
Clutch type ________________________ Hydraulic plate clut-
ches, brake bands
and one-way coup-
lings
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear: 29–30 / 46–48
259Specifications
Suspension
Steering
Brake system
Spring type, front and rear ___________ Coil springs
Maximum deflection of springs:
Front __________________________ 7.09 in (180 mm)
Rear ___________________________ 7.87 in (200 mm)
Dampers, front and rear _____________ Gas-filled dampers
Steering _________________________ Power-assisted ste-
ering of
rack-and-pinion
type; telescopic ste-
ering-column shaft
with universal joints
Number of turns, lock to lock __________ 2.9
Power-steering fluid ________________ Power-steering fluid
CHF 11S
Footbrake (ABS) ____________________ Hydraulic, dual-
circuit brake sys-
tem. Diagonally
split circuit with vac-
uum servo unit.
Disc brakes front
and rear. EBD, see
page 152.
Handbrake ________________________ Acts on rear wheels
Brake fluid _________________________ DOT 4
Brake-fluid capacity _________________ 0.951 qts (900 ml)
Disc diameter:
Front, ventilated ___________________ 11.34 in (288 mm)
Front, ventilated, certain variants *_____ 12.05 in (306 mm)
Rear, solid _______________________ 11.26 in (286 mm)
Rear, ventilated, certain variants * _____ 11.81 in (300 mm)
* 15” wheel must not be used on these
variants.
Total friction area of brake pads:
Front ___________________________ 36.3 in
2
(234 cm
2
)
Rear ___________________________ 15.5 in
2
(100 cm
2
)
260 Specifications
Wheels and tires
(recommended dimensions)
2.3t 2.3T 2.3 Turbo
All season tires
215/55 R16 93 H X X X
225/45 R17 94 V XL/RF X X X
Summer tires
225/45 R17 94 W XL/RF X X X
Winter tires
205/65 R15 94 Q X X
215/55 R16 93 Q X X X
225/45 R17 94 Q XL/RF X X X
Wheel sizes
6 x 15” X X
6,5 x 16” X X X
7 x 17” X X X
15" wheels must not be fitted to the 2.3 Turbo since the size of the brake
discs prohibits this.
Speed ratings and load indexes, see page 225.
Always
contact an authorized Saab dealer if you wish to fit other wheels
or tires than those fitted as standard.
Compact spare:
Wheel___________________________ 4 x 16”
Tire_____________________________ T115/70 R16
Pressure_________________________ 60 psi (420 kPa)
Maximum life _____________________ 2,200 miles
(3500 km)
Maximum speed __________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)
NOTICE
Snow chains:
Snow chains must
not
be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only
be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:
Wheels Tires
6 x 15” ________ 205/65 R15 or
205/65 R15 M+S
6.5 x 16”_______ 215/55 R16 or
215/55 R16 M+S
Snow chains must not be fitted to 17" wheels.
Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for advice on snow chains.
NOTICE
Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.
Wheel offset must be 49 mm.
Vehicles with 12.05” in (306 mm) front brake discs must not use
15” rims.
261Specifications
Lowest recommended tire pressure, cold tires
Tire size Load/speed
mph (km/h)
1)
Front
kPa/psi
Rear
kPa/psi
All season tires
215/55 R16 93 H 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 220/32
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 220/32
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 290/42 270/39
225/45 R17 94 V
XL/RF
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 250/36 240/35
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 250/36 240/35
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 300/43 290/42
Summer tire
225/45 R17 94 W
XL/RF
1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 250/36 240/35
4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 250/36 240/35
1–5 pers./120– (190–) 300/43 290/42
Tire size Load/speed
mph (km/h)
1)
Front
kPa/psi
Rear
kPa/psi
Winter tires
205/65 R15 94 Q
Winter tire
for 2.3t
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 260/38 260/38
215/55 R16 93 Q
Winter tire.
All variants.
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 260/38 260/38
225/45 R17 94 Q
XL/RF
Winter tire.
All variants.
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 250/36 250/36
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 270/39 270/39
Compact spare
T115/70 R16
Spare wheel
Max 50 (80) 420/60 420/60
1) Do not exceed posted speed limits.
By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the surrounding
air temperature.
The values for tire pressure in the table above are for tires at 68°F (20°C).
The tire pressure will increase as the tires become warm (e.g. during motor-
way driving), and decrease as they cool.
When the temperature of the tires increase or decrease by 10 degrees the
tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease by 10 kPa/2 psi
(0.1 bar).
262 Specifications
Plates and labels
When consulting your Saab dealer, it may be
necessary to quote the car’s V.I.N., engine
and gearbox numbers.
1 V.I.N. number, inside windshield.
2 Certification label.
3 Gearbox number.
4 Engine number.
5
USA:
Label for color codes (trim and body)
Tire information label can be found on the
B-pillar. See also page 226.
Canada:
Label for tire pressure and color
codes (trim and body).
6 Chassis number plate.
7 Chassis number, stamped on body.
8 Vehicle Emission Control Information.
263Specifications
1 Region ___________
Y = Northern Europe
2 Country __________
S = Sweden
3 Manufacturer _____
3 = Saab Automobile AB
4 Product line ______
E = 9-5
5 Model series ______
B = 9-5 Linear with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags
D = 9-5 Arc with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags
H = 9-5 Aero with drivers and
passenger-side airbags
6 Body version _____
4 =
5 =
4-door
5-door
7 Gearbox __________
5 = Manual 5-speed
9 = Automatic 5-speed
8 Engine variant _____
A =
E =
G =
2.3T
2.3t
2.3 Turbo
9 Check digit ________
0–9/X
10 Model year ________
5 = 2005
11 Factory ___________
3 = Trollhättan
12 Serial number ______
000001–999999
position:1234567891011 12
||||||||||| |
V.I.N.:
Y S 3 E H 4 9 G 6 5 3 045842
| | ||||
1 23456
= identification codes for certain chassis details
264 Specifications
Several of the systems in your
Saab car can be adjusted to
better fit your individual needs
Some functions are governed by legal
requirements and cannot therefore be
reprogrammed.
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for
further information.
Car alarm/central locking system:
The number of blinks when locking/
unlocking.
Automatic locking of the trunk when the
car is driven, 1 to 8 mph (2–14 km/h), YES
or NO.
Preclude the unlocking of the trunk while
the car is driven, YES or NO.
Automatic locking of the trunk after
1 second–4 minutes if it has not been
opened, YES or NO.
Automatic locking of the trunk when it is
closed, YES or NO.
Automatic locking of all doors when the
car is driven above 7.5 mph (12 km/h),
YES or NO.
Saab Information Display:
Outdoor temperature display can be
adjusted.
Miscellaneous:
Select the on-time for heated rear seat.
Additional sweep of the wipers after
windshield washer function (ON or OFF).
Courtesy Headlight Feature on-time can
vary from 20 to 50 seconds.
Night panel illumination deactivation
speed for the speedometer can be adjus-
ted.
Following adjustments can be
done by the driver:
Automatic Climate Control (ACC):
To alter the preprogrammed ”AUTO” start
up mode with your own preferences you can
manually select the desired settings for:
Temperature.
Fan speed.
•Air distribution.
See ”Programming I” on page 79 and ”Pro-
gramming II” on page 80.
Saab 9-5 Audio System (see page 99):
Maximum starting volume (when the
radio is switched on).
Telephone volume (if the car is equipped
with a phone connected to the audio
system).
Speed dependent volume (volume
increases or decreases with vehicle
speed).
Loudness.
Daytime Running Lights:
To disable, turn off the ignition and pull out
fuse 35, see page 214.
265Index
Index
A
A/C system, fault diagnosis _______ 235
A/C system, maintenance
_________ 234
ABS brakes
____________________ 152
ACC
__________________________ 73
ACC functions
___________________ 76
ACC, automatic climate control
_____ 73
ACC, calibration
_________________ 81
ACC, condensation
_______________ 82
ACC, programming
_______________ 79
ACC, useful tips
_________________ 81
Adjusting the steering wheel
_______ 106
Adjustment, seats
________________ 12
Air conditioning (A/C), fault diagnosis
and maintenance ______________ 234
Air distribution, ACC
______________ 78
Airbag
_________________________ 28
Alarm
_________________________ 44
Alarm functions
__________________ 47
Alarm signals
________________ 44, 47
Alternator
_____________________ 194
Alternator drive belt
__________ 194, 257
Alternator rating
________________ 257
Anticorrosion treatment
___________ 240
Antidazzle rear-view mirror
________ 111
Ashtrays
______________________ 117
Audio System
___________________ 83
Audio System, quick guide _________ 85
Autochecking of lights on starting
____ 58
Auto-dimming rear-view mirror with
garage door opener ____________ 108
Automatic climate control (ACC)
_____ 73
Automatic transmission, technical
data _________________________ 258
Aviod theft, tip
__________________ 179
B
Battery ________________________ 192
Battery charging/replacing
________ 193
Battery, boost starting
____________ 174
Before a long journey
____________ 241
Before towing a camper or trailer
___ 164
Belt guide
______________________ 16
Boost starting using jump leads
____ 174
Brake and clutch fluid
____________ 189
Brake-fluid reservoir
_____________ 189
Brakes, technical data
____________ 259
Bulbs, changing
________________ 197
Bulbs, table of
__________________ 210
Buying new tires
________________ 219
C
CD changer _____________________ 95
CD player
______________________ 93
CHECK messages
_______________ 64
CHECKING
_____________________ 64
Calibration, ACC
_________________ 81
Cancelling the programmed settings
__ 79
Car alarm
_______________________ 44
Car care
_______________________ 181
Cargo net, 9-5 SportWagon
_______ 128
Carpeting, care of
_______________ 236
Cassette player
__________________ 90
Catalytic converter, important
considerations _________________ 137
Central locking
___________________ 38
Change language in SID
___________ 66
Change of address notification
_____ 248
Changing a wheel
_______________ 231
Changing bulbs
_________________ 197
Changing wiper blades
___________ 195
Charger/Jump starting
____________ 176
Charging the battery/Jump starting
__ 176
Chassis number
________________ 262
Chassis number, key to
___________ 263
Checks before towing a camper or
trailer ________________________ 164
Child safety
_____________________ 21
Child safety locks, rear doors
_______ 41
Cleaning, engine bay
_____________ 238
Clock
_______________________65, 66
Color code, body
________________ 262
Color code, trim
_________________ 262
Compact spare wheel
____________ 230
Compass
______________________ 112
Condensation, ACC
_______________ 82
266 Index
Coolant _______________________ 188
Courtesy Headlight Feature
________ 68
Crash memory, see EDR
_________ 249
Cruise control
__________________ 151
Cup holder
____________________ 120
D
DICE/TWICE ___________________ 212
Dampers
______________________ 259
Date code, tires
_________________ 229
Definitions and terminology, tire
____ 226
Determining correct load, tires
_____ 228
Dim-dipped beam
________________ 67
Direction indicators
_______________ 69
Door handles
___________________ 38
Door mirrors
___________________ 107
Doors, locks & luggage compartment
_37
Drive belt
______________________ 257
Drive belt, alternator
_____________ 194
Drive belts, length
_______________ 257
Driver’s seat, programmable
________ 14
Driving at night
_________________ 168
Driving in hot weather
____________ 160
Driving with a load
______________ 168
E
EDR (Event Data Recorders) ______ 249
ESP
__________________________ 155
Electric heating seat
______________ 15
Electric heating, front seats
_________ 15
Electric windows
________________ 113
Electrical system, technical data
____ 257
Electronic Stability Program, ESP
___ 155
Electronic starting interlock
_________ 43
Emergency operation of sunroof
____ 115
Emission control systems
_________ 184
Engine bay
____________________ 183
Engine bay, cleaning
_____________ 238
Engine number
_________________ 262
Engine oil, grade
________________ 255
Engine, description
______________ 186
Engine, technical data
____________ 254
Engine, temperature gauge
________ 59
Engine-oil level, checking
_________ 186
Event Data Recorders (EDR)
______ 249
Expansion tank, coolant
__________ 188
F
Fault codes, Audio System ________ 104
Flat spots, tires
_________________ 218
Fluid level, automatic transmission
__ 188
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan
___ 121
Folding the rear seat,
9-5 SportWagon _______________ 124
Frequently asked questions on airbag 35
Front fog lights
___________________ 70
Frost warning
____________________ 62
Fuel
__________________________ 138
Fuel consumption
________________ 61
Fuel gauge
_____________________ 59
Fuel grade
_____________________ 254
Fuse box under hood
____________ 215
Fuse panel
_____________________ 211
Fuses
_________________________ 211
G
Garage door opener _____________ 108
Gearbox number
________________ 262
Gearbox oil, checking
____________ 188
Gearbox, technical data,
__________ 258
Glove compartment
______________ 118
H
Handbrake _____________________ 179
Hazard warning lights
_____________ 70
Head restraint
___________________ 15
Headlight flasher
_________________ 67
Headlights
______________________ 67
Hood
_________________________ 182
Horn
__________________________ 106
267Index
I
If a tire goes flat ________________ 223
Ignition switch
__________________ 132
Immobilizer
_____________________ 43
Indicator and warning lights
________ 52
Indicator lights
___________________ 52
Instrument illumination
____________ 69
Instruments and controls
__________ 51
Interior equipment
_______________ 105
Interior lighting
_________________ 116
Interior rearview mirror
___________ 107
J
Jack _________________________ 232
K
Key ___________________________ 38
Key to chassis number
___________ 263
Key, remove
___________________ 132
L
LATCH (child safety) ______________ 22
Labeling, tire sidewall
____________ 224
Labels
__________________________ 7
Leather upholstery, care of
________ 236
Light horn
______________________ 67
Light switches
___________________ 67
Loading your vehicle
_____________ 226
Luggage-compartment lighting
_____ 116
M
Main instrument panel _____________ 52
Main/dipped beam
_______________ 67
Maintenance schedule
___________ 246
Maintenance, A/C-system
_________ 234
Manual gearbox, technical data
____ 258
Maxi fuses
_____________________ 212
Milometer
______________________ 58
Motoring abroad
________________ 241
N
New tires, buying _______________ 219
Night Panel
_____________________ 65
O
Oil capacity, engine ______________ 254
Oil change, engine
______________ 187
Oil specification
_________________ 254
Outdoor temperature
______________ 61
Owner assistance
_______________ 247
P
Paintwork, touching-in ____________ 238
Parking Assistance
______________ 177
Parking lights
____________________ 67
Plates and labels
________________ 262
Poly-V-belt
_____________________ 194
Power steering
_________________ 191
Power-steering fluid
______________ 191
Pressure gauge
__________________ 60
Programming I, ACC
______________ 79
Programming II, ACC
_____________ 80
Programming the ACC
____________ 79
Q
Quality grading, tires _____________ 221
Questions on function of airbag
______ 35
Quick guide, Audio System
_________ 85
R
Radiator fan ____________________ 194
Radio
__________________________ 88
Rain sensor
_____________________ 71
Rear fog light
____________________ 68
Rear seat, 9-5 Sedan, folding
______ 121
Rear seat, 9-5 SportWagon, folding
_ 124
Rear-seat head restraints
__________ 16
Rear-view mirror, auto-dimming
____ 111
268 Index
Rearview mirrors ________________ 107
Reclamation
___________________ 242
Recommendations for cars with
automatic transmission, towing a
camper or trailer
_______________ 162
Refuelling
_____________________ 138
Relay panel
____________________ 214
Remote control
__________________ 38
Remote-control battery, changing
____ 41
Remove the key
________________ 132
Replacement, wheel
_____________ 222
Reporting safety defects
__________ 248
Reprogramming of systems
_______ 264
Reservoir, power-steering fluid
_____ 191
Rev counter
____________________ 58
Reversing lights
_________________ 70
Roof load
_____________________ 166
Running-in
____________________ 157
S
SDM _________________________ 249
SID
___________________________ 61
Saab 9-5 Audio System
___________ 83
Saab Information Display (SID)
_____ 61
Saab Parking Assistance
_________ 177
Safety belts
_____________________ 16
Safety belts, care of
_____________ 235
Safety-belt pretensioners
__________ 16
Safety-belt reminder
______________ 16
Seats
__________________________ 12
Securing a load
__________________ 42
Selector lever indication, automatic
transmission
___________________ 61
Sentronic, manual mode
__________ 148
Service costs
___________________ 247
Service information
______________ 248
Service intervals
________________ 246
Service record retention
__________ 247
Settings, seats
__________________ 12
Side airbags
____________________ 32
Signalling, horn
_________________ 106
Sliding floor, 9-5 SportWagon
______ 129
Snow chains
___________________ 159
Spare wheel
___________________ 230
Spare wheel and tools
___________ 170
Spark plugs
____________________ 257
Speedometer
________________58, 59
Starting in cold weather, ACC
_______ 79
Starting in hot weather, ACC
_______ 79
Steering wheel adjustment
________ 106
Steering, technical data
__________ 259
Steps for determining correct load
limit _________________________ 228
Stone-chip damage, repairing
______ 238
Storage compartments
___________ 118
Sun visors
_____________________ 117
Sunroof
_______________________ 114
Suspension
____________________ 259
Suspension, technical data
________ 259
Switches
_______________________ 67
Symboler
________________________ 9
Systems, adjustment
_____________ 264
T
TCS OFF _______________________ 57
Table of fuses
__________________ 213
Tachometer
_____________________ 58
Tailgate, opening
_________________ 42
Tank gauge
_____________________ 59
Technical data
__________________ 251
Temperature control, ACC
_________ 75
Temperature gauge, engine
________ 59
Temperature zones, ACC
__________ 75
Textile carpeting
________________ 236
Through-load hatch
______________ 123
Tie Downs
_____________________ 123
Tightening torque, wheel studs
_____ 231
Tip, driving at night
______________ 168
Tip, to avoid theft
________________ 179
Tire chains
_____________________ 223
Tire date code
__________________ 229
Tire inspection and rotation
________ 218
Tire markings
___________________ 225
Tire pressure
___________________ 169
Tire sidewall labeling
_____________ 224
Tire terminology and definitions
____ 226
Tire, compact spare
______________ 230
Tires
_____________________217, 260
Tires, winter
____________________ 260
Tools
_________________________ 170
Touching-in the paintwork
_________ 238
Towbar attachment
______________ 161
Towbar load
____________________ 165
Towing the car
__________________ 171
269Index
Towing, automatics ______________ 171
Trailer weights
_________________ 253
Treadwear indicators
____________ 219
Trionic
________________________ 184
Trip computer
___________________ 61
Trip meter
______________________ 58
Trunk
_________________________ 121
Trunk lid, opening
________________ 42
Turbo gauge
____________________ 60
Turbo, points to note
_____________ 136
U
Under the hood _________________ 183
Uniform tire quality grading
________ 221
Upholstery and trim
______________ 236
Upholstery and trim, care of
_______ 236
Useful tips, ACC
_________________ 81
V
Vanity mirrors __________________ 117
Vehicle Data Collection
___________ 249
Ventilated front seats
_____________ 14
Viscosity, engine oil
_____________ 254
W
Warning labels ___________________ 7
Warning light, AIR BAG
___________ 33
Warning lights
___________________ 52
Washers
______________________ 195
Washers, windshield
_____________ 196
Washing the car
________________ 237
Waxing and polishing
____________ 238
Wear indicators, tires
____________ 219
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ______________________ 34
Wheel replacement
______________ 222
Wheel, change
_________________ 231
Wheels and tires
________________ 260
Wheels and tires, sizes
___________ 260
When it is time for new tires
_______ 219
Windshield washers
______________ 71
Windshield wipers
________________ 71
Winter tires
________________228, 260
Wiper blades, replacing
__________ 195
Wipers and washers
__________71, 195
X
Xenon headlight ________________ 197
270 Notes
Notes
271Notes
272 Notes
Fuel
IMPORTANT: Do not overfill.
The level must not come up into
the filler pipe because the fuel
must have space room to
expand
.
1 Engine oil
For information see chapter
"Technical data".
2 Brake/clutch fluid
DOT 4 brake fluid.
Do not use DOT 5 silicone fluid.
3 Coolant
Do not allow the coolant level to
fall below the MIN mark on the
expansion tank.
Top up as necessary with a mix-
ture of equal parts Saab Anti-
freeze and water.
4 Washer fluid
5Battery
6 Power steering fluid
Power Steering Fluid CHF 11S
(P/N 8996860).
Recommended octane rating:
Unleaded
gasoline 87–93 AON
For optimum performance
Saab recommends:
2.3t 185 hp (Linear) –
AON 90.
2.3T 220 hp (Arc) and
2.3Turbo 250hp(Aero)–
AON 93.
Fuel tank
capacity:
18.5 U.S.gal.
(70 liter)
6
5
1
2
3
4
IB3638
Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
NOTICE
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be required more
frequently if the car is being used under certain conditions, see
section "Customer Assistance and Information.
US/CA MY2005 Ordering nr. 42 94 98.
Printed in Sweden on chlorine-free paper 2004-03.
© Copyright Saab Automobile AB, 2004.
All information and illustrations in this manual are based on the specifi-
cations that were available at the time of printing. Model variants, tech-
nical data and equipment vary from market to market, and may be
altered without prior notice.
Note that illustrations in this manual can depict cars fitted with extra
equipment. Your Saab dealer will be pleased to inform you of the exact
specifications that apply to your market.
262


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Saab 9-5 - 2005 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Saab 9-5 - 2005 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 17,35 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info